Anda di halaman 1dari 321

:N2VERS!

TY Of CALEFORNIA

LOS ANGELES

JBool?5

on lEoppt an5 (Ibal&aea

Vol. XXI.

OF THE SERIES

THE

EGYPTIAN HEAVEN AND HELL

Vol.

II.

THE SHORT FORM

of the

BOOK AM-JUAT

AND

THE BOOK OF GATES

BOOKS ON EGYPT AND CHALDAEA.


Vol.
I.

Vol. II.

EGYPTIAN RELIGION. --EGYPTIAN MAGIC.


-EGYPTIAN LANGUAGE. -BABYLONIAN RELIGION. -ASSYRIAN LANGUAGE. -BOOK OF THE DEAD, vol.

,,

Vol. III.
Vol. IV.

Vol. V.
Vol. VI.

i.

Vol. VII. Vol. VIII. -

,,

,, ,,

vol.

ii.

Vol. IX. Vol. X.

HISTORY OF EGYPT,

Vol. XI.
Vol. XII. Vol. XIII. Vol.
,,

XIV.

,,

Vol. Vol.

XV.

XVI.

Vol. XVII.
Veil.

XVIII.

Vol.

XIX.

-THE DECREES OF MEMPHIS AND CANOPUS-THE ROSETTA STONE, vol. -THE DECREES OF MEMPHIS AND CANOPUS-THE ROSETTA STONE, vol. -THE DECREES OF MEMPHIS AND CANOPUS-THE STELE OF CANOPUS,
i.

vol. iii. vol. ivol. ii. vol. iii. vol. iv. vol. V. vol. vi. vol. vii. vol. viii.

ii.

vol.
Vol.

iii.

XX.

-EGYPTIAN HEAVEN AND HELL,


,,
,. ,, ,, >>

Vol. XXI.Vol. XXII.-

vol. vol. vol.

i.

ii.

iii.

Vol. XXIII.

-BABYLONIAN MAGIC.
FttU
l'roi<pecttvsi

Ihi prepara/ioi,:}

on application.

KEG AN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER &


Dryden House, Gerrard Street, London,

CO. Ltd.
\V.

1Boo\\B

on iBG^pt

atib (Tbalbaea

THE

EGYPTIAN HEAVEN AND HELL

E. A.

WALLTS BUDGE, M.A., Litt.D., D.Litt., D.Lit.


KEEPEK OF THE EGYPTIAN AND ASSYRIAN ANTIQUITIES
IN

THE BRITISH MUSEUM

VOL.

II.

THE SHORT FORM

of the

BOOK AM-TUAT

AND

THE BOOK OF GATES

LONDON

KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER &


Dryden House,
43,

CO. Ltd.

Gerrard Street, W.

1905
[/J// rights resetved'\

I.OSUDy

PUIMKl)
NT.

TIV GII.IIKIIT

AM) JilMNIiTON t.nMTKn


F.r.

John's hoi'sk, ti.KKKKNWFt.t.,

SSI

NOTE
This volume
treat
of
is

the second of a series of three volumes which


It

the

Egyptian Heaven and Hell.

contains the

complete hieroglyphic text of the Sumniar}', or short form of


the

Book Am-Tuat, and the complete hierogl3'phic text of the Book of Gates, with translations and reproductions of all the

illustrations.

series of

Chapters dealing with the origin and

contents of Books of the Other World, with prefatory remarks,

and a

full

index to the whole work, will be found in the third

volume.

48r2C'57

CONTENTS
The The
(Goddess Nut. Seti
I.

.....
.
.

From the Sarcuphagus of

Froiillapiccu
:

Short Form of the Jjook

Am-Tuat

Hour Second Hour Third Hour Fourth Hour Fifth Hour Sixth Hour Seventh Hour Eighth Hour Ninth Hour Tenth Hour Eleventh Hour Twelfth Hour
First
.

1.

The Alabaster Sarc


Ari'ENDix
:

Belzoni's Account of his Discovery

11.

Tomb of Seti I The Book of Gates The Western Vestibule, or Ante-chamber of


OF the
:

III.

THE TUAT, SeT-AmENTET, GUARDED BY SeT AND Tat. With 2 Illustrations The First Gate, guarded by Saa-Set. With 10
Illustrations

IV.

The Second Gate, Sevtet-uauau, guarded bv


Aqebi.

With

lUustiatiuns

....

The Third Gate, Nebt-s-tchefau, guarded by


TcHETBi.

With 10

lllu.stiation.s

Vlll

CONTENTS
PAGE

CHAP.

VI.

VII.
VIII.

The Fourth Gate, Arit, guarded by Teka-hra. 139 With 11 Illustrations The Judgment Hall of Osiris. With 1 llhistiation
iri8

The Fifth Gate, Nebt-auA, guarded by Set-kmIfiS MAAT-F. With 4 Illustrations rX. The Sixth Gate, Pestit, guarded by Akha-en190 maat. With 27 Illustrations X. The Seventh Gate, Bekhkhi, guarded by Set.
. . .

....
. .

XI.
XII.
XIII.

hra. With 9 Illustrations .219 The Eighth Gate, Aat-shefsheft, guarded by Ab-ta. With 12 Illustrations .237 The Ninth Gate, Tcheserit, guarded by Sethu.
.

With 10

Illustrations

259

XIV.

The Tenth Gate, Shetat-besu, guarded by Am279 NETU-F. With 12 Illustrations The Eleventh Gate, Tesert-baiu, guarded by
.
.

Sebi and Eeri, or the Eastern Vestibule

OF the Tuat.

With

2 Illustrations

301

VAlllATX
V. 10,
1.
I.

3,

for

"Thon-tent-baiu" read "Tt-nt-haiu

"
;

p.

20,
;

10, foi- "Ni'l)t-nui-tuatiu "


IS,

read " Metchet-niu-ni'bt-Tuatiu"

)..

1.

-J,

for

Y ^T^

'wid

f ^T^
-^^^

p. 2:J,

1.

3,

for ? read

p. :51,

I.

1,

for '^^;^ read

dTH

p. r,7,

1.

3,

for "tlie
p. 113,

magical powers" read "her magical powers to those";

^f-H
1.26, for
p.
ll;,
/I\
1.

A
;

D
h

read

p.

lo,

1.

1 1

for

wnd
;

3, for "Tehetl.i" read " Nel.t-tehefau "

p. 147,

1.

7.

for

read l^.

THE SHORT FORM


OF THE

BOOK OF AM-TUAT
THE SUMMAEY OF THE BOOK: OP WHAT IN THE UNDERWOELD.
IS

The Beginning of the Horn of Amentet, [which is] THE Uttermost Point of the Deepest Darkness.

THE FIEST HOUE.


This god entereth into the earth through the Hall of
the horizon of Amentet.

There are one hundred and

twenty atru

to

journey over in this Hall before a

man

arriveth at the gods of the Tuat.


of the first Field of the
fields to

The name

Tuat

is

Net-ra.
are in

He
to

(i.e.,

Ea) allotteth

the gods
to

who

[his] following,

and he beginneth

send forth words

and

to

work out the plans


shall

of the divine beings of

the Tuat in respect of this Field.


AVliosoever
VOL.
II.

have

these

made

(i.e.,

copied)

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT


AAAAAA
I
I

SUMMARY
I

A^/^^^A

J\

'^^m

i<

^
fT=f

*
A/VVW\

cr^
I I

^?^tk'i^ _J>! ^ II Jt"

lO

/vwvv\ A/vwv\

A.^^ OLD ]

^^

J\

A/WW.

^^^ Ll)%J

THE SECOND HOUR.


Tliis great

god afterwards
is

tuketli

up

his position in

Ur-nrst,

wliicli

tlirec

liundved and nine atru in

leuoth, and one hundred and twenty atru in width.

The name of the gods who TuATi. Whosoever knoweth


allot fields in

are in this Field


their

is

Baiu-

names

shall

have his

existence with them, aud unto

liiiii

shall this great

god

the place wherein they are in the Field

OF Urnes.

He

shall

stand up with the Gods

who

Stand

Up

(Ahau), he shall travel on in the following


THE SECOND HOUR
of this great god,
5

he shall enter into the earth, he shall


the Tuat, he shall cleave a passage
witli

force a

way through

through the tresses of the gods

flowiug hair

(Henksu), he

shall travel

on by the Eater of the Ass


of the lands,

(Am-aa)

after the
tlio

emptying

he shall eat
shall

bread-cakes in

lioat of the Earth,

and there

be given unto him the fore-part of Tatuba.

Whosoever
of the of the

shall

have

made

in

writing
(i.e.,

(or,

in

drawing) similitudes of the Baiu-Tuati

the Souls

Tuat)

in the

forms in which they are in

Ament

Tuat

now

the beginning of such representa-

tions should be

from Amentet,

and

whosoever shall
in their names,

make

offerings unto

them upon earth

[these things I say] shall act as magical protectors to

that person upon earth, regularly and unfailingly.

And

whosoever

sliall

know

the words which

the

gods of the Tuat speak to this god, and the words

which are said by him

to

them when he

is

approaching

the gods of the Tuat, [these words I say] shall act as

magical protectors to him that knoweth them upon


earth, regularly

and unfailingly.
is

Shesat-maket-neb-s

the

name

of the

hour of the

night which guideth this great god through this Field.

THE SECOND HOUR


I.

Fkom the Tomb of Seti

I.

(lines

23

61).

^ D _Hli^

J^

^aaJ^aa

wvwv\ t=i:^

_m:^

<=> dZ]

<=> Ji

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT


nnnn
<2nn

SUMMARY
\> /wwva

Ji

Jr

/wvaaa

i^^^

1 <==> Ji

\>

AAA/^^ ,vvvvvv __--

AAAAAA
I
I I

A^yv^\A

1
J\
J] /]

/\ AAAAAA /vAAAA -iJ

D D

Jl

s^

;i

L[i::z:i

AAAAAA

III

IS


THE SECOND HOUR
AAAAAA
I

ri

5^
'

^-^1
^O
I

AAAAAA

^
I

AWVWV

<=^

<=> A
T-T

Jj

'

^"=11

D
I

THE SECOND HOUE.


II.

Fkom the Leyden Papyrus,

T. 71.

D _Cr^

Ji

/WvWN

AAAA/V\

D _CrNS'

^^
s
I

!^
I
I I

1,

^V\AAA

AAAAAA

A^/\AAA

^^^
I

Jl

J\

Ic:^^

^fe^Mir^^iv^k,

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

r=iD

^kvP4ZJ1^=11^ A A ^^ S H ^ -^mw
<:^

c^

jyq^r^Hiiiii^iikP^
O
^'^'v^A^

AAA/^

[ZTZ]

^
AAAAAA AAAAAA
I
I

.-

AAAAAA

S
I
I

^\

m
C|^^
.*\

^-^5
1 1

'^
I

iii!^fliiii:^jiTr^i^i
AAAAAA
I

D<:=>

Ji

^^

-ZL

;1
I

AAAAAA

^i^V
^.>k
^ O ^
AA/VV\A Ll~J

AA/VAAA

/wwv\

^^

7\ 1

^^ihn

THE

THIIU) IIOUE.

This great god afterwards taketli up his position in


the Fields of the PEiiU-gods
(i.e.,

the Fighters),

and

THE THIRD HOUR


this great

god paddletli his way over the Stream of


is

Osiris (Net-Asar) in sailing up this Field, which

three hundred and nine atru long, and one hundred

and twenty atru wide.


to those

Tiiis

great god uttercth words

who

are in the following of Osiris to this City,

and he

allotteth unto

them

estates

which are situated

in this Field.

Baiu-shetaiu
gods
their

(i.e.,

who

are in

Hidden Souls) is the name of the tliis Field, and whosoever knoweth
shall be able to approach to

names upon earth


is,

the place where Osiris

and there

shall be given

unto

him water
Whosoever

for his Field.


is

Net-nei;-ua-kiieper-auatu
shall

the

name

of this Field.

know

these hidden similitudes of the

Hidden Souls
depicted in

in the correct forms wherein they are


of the

Ament

Tuat
lie

now the

beginning of

such representations should

from Amentet

[these
and

figures I say] shall act as magical protectors to that

man upon
unfailingly.

earth, [and] in Neter-khert, regularly

Whosoever knoweth
and he
pits).

these,

when he

is

making

his

journey past them shall escape from their roarings,


shall not fall

down
this,

into their furnaces (or,

Whosoever knoweth
over [his] seat

when he
this,

is

keeping ward

(or, place), his

bread-cake shall be with

Ea

and whosoever knoweth

being soul [and]


legs,

spirit, shall

have the mastery over his

and

shall

never enter into the place of destruction, but he shall


10

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT


foitli

SUMMARY
and
shall

come

with

liis

attributes (or, forms),

snufl" tlie air for his hour.

TiiENTENT-BAiu

is

the iiamc of

tlie

hour

of the night

which uuidcth

this <neat

Kod through

this Field.

THE THIKD HOUR


I.

From the Tomp. of

Seti

I.

(lines

62

105).

o D

nnnn

(71) AWAA t^^^A^^yvs

Ji n

Ji

i=ii=f=3

l^/^wvc^^fr:

AA^AAA

^^ M.

'-^

A^^/v^A

-/I

Hi

*~^

r-.

_Zi

rv\A^/\A

crrtrr)

aaaaaa

intiiiii

/S.VSAAA


THE THIRD HOUR
M

II
AAAAAA AA/W/^

Ji

nirf^q^2P-kkiifi^VS^
^^

k^iii;^:
ji
*

Z]

Ji

mi
^II^

11

^^m

/=

K->

/>AAAA^

/WSAAA

AA/VSAA

[kii]

\> AA/NAAA

'^

THE THIRD HOUR.


II.

From the Leyden Papyrus,

T. 71.

3SI

:=^

_^ 1^1

^ A ^

JT

111

JL

I .wwvs

^IkTEX^U^^Iiik
s
I

(i^:

^Hi^ni^zk

12

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

iTiiifk^ivX^?;ri
J;^M-l^iui^MI
^
s
I

,-^

1Jik^iM^q^2 I^S^J m L^lk


^ ^

^^li =
C30
I 1

M^q^2W^k
l-TT-l
l

^^"^

AAAAAA

'^i

^^iSf^^^^^-m

r^?-kasL:^i^^2
P
I
I I

ra

|f^^A;(|^2
o

P-ki>jlc^

(^

2hk%^^.r.iPM^Ik2ii

THE FOURTH HOUR

I3

.jL.^fe-:2B^.^_^xll>i^m^^^S

l^sdkX^f^kTI
I

u
AAAA/V\ /W,/W\

^^>^

I*.

THE FOURTH HOUE.


The majesty
Circle of
of

this great god,

having been towed

along, afterwards taketh

up

his position in the secret


affairs of

Amentet, and he perfurmeth the


Tiuit

the

gods of

tlie

who
is

are therein by

means
the

of his voice,

but he seeth them not.

Ankh-kiieperu
Circle.

the

name

of

gate

of

this

Ament-setiiau

is

the

name

of this Circle.

Whosoever knoweth
and
secret doors

this representation of tlie

hidden

roads of Re-statet, and the holy paths of the Ammeiiet,


tlie

which are

in the

Land

of

Seker,

the god
of

who

is

upon

his sand, shall be in the condition

him

that eateth the bread-cakes which are [made]

for the

mouth

of

the Living gods in the Temple of

Teni.

"Whosoever knoweth this shall be in

tlie

condition of

him

lluit

is

moat on the ways, and he

shall journey

14

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY
he shall see the

over the roads of Ee-setiiau, and


representations of the Aiimehet.

UiiT-EM-SEKiiEMU-SET

is

the

name

of tlie

hour

of tlie

niiiht wliicli uuidetli this j^reat "rod.

THE FOURTH HOUR


I.From the Tomb of
Seti
T.

(lines

lOG 138).
s

q
I

J^

jT-Ms;

lll/wvLi/vwwv

/I

THE FOURTH HOUR


A^^AAA

15

THE FOURTH HOUR.


II.

FiiOM

THE Leyden Rapyrus,

T. 71.

D ^Bf^'Ti

tl

.A

III

AftAAftA

A^WVNA

/V^^W\

Z:>

O ^

-<

-<2>-

<d>

/^^,yv^

JXV^

i-J

rj\Nsr\r\

'^

^ O

/vv^A^^

'^
'

V*V

JI

Jl

U A/V^AA^

rfll

!l

= s^>Sf|^2

D
"'^^

l=M.^PJ^\"q"fliqik^

l6

THE HOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

f\\^\^!^Kl%.^0\ff,^

^ THE FIFTH HOUR.


This great god
is

towed along oxcv the ways

of

Maat

of tlie
of the

Tuat

tlirougli Ihc \\\>\h'v ludl' of Ihis secret Circle


is

god Sekek, wlio

upon

his sand,

and he

neitlier

looketh upon nor gazcth at the secret figure of the


earth which

containcth
in

the flesh of
liaiii

this

god.
licar

The
the

gods

wh(t
of

arc
Iifi,

[the

df]

this

god

words
god
is.

who
is

cricth unto llicm

IVoni wliere tins

AilA-NETERU
City]'.

the

name

of

the

door

[of

this

Ament
it

is

the

name

of tlie Circle of this god, [and in

arc] the secret path of Anientet,


lioly

and the doors


of
tlie

of the

hidden palace, and the

jdace

Land or
[and his]

Sekeu

[willi

his]

Ih'sh,

and

[his]

nieiidieis,

body, in tlie divine

form which they had at


is

first.

lUlu-A.MU-TUAT
[this] Circle.

the

name

of the

gods who are hi

Their

furiiis {(iru)

wlio are in their liour,


THE FIFTH HOUR
and
tlii'ir

I7

Rccret

sliapes {kheperu) neither

know, nor

look upon, nor sec this image (or, similitude) of


(or,

Sekeu

the

hawk)

himself.

WHiosoever shall make these representations according


to the

image which

is

in writing in the

hidden places
Palace,

of the Tuat, at the south of the

Hidden

and

wliosoever shall
soul
sliall

know them
tlie

shall he at peace, offerings of Seker,

and his and the

unite itself to

goddess KiiE.MiT shall not hack his l)ody in pieces, and

he shall go on his wa}' tcnvards her in peace.


ever shall

Whoso-

make

ollerings to these gods

upon earth

[these offerings, I say, shall act as magical protectors


to that

man upon

earth,

and

in

Netek-khekt, regularly
hour of the
this

and unfailingly].
Sem-iiek-ab-uaa-s
night which
Field.
is

the
this

name
great

of the

guideth

god

through

THE FIFTH HOUR


I. From the Tomb of Seti
I.

(lines

139 173).
%=5

/ww.^

J^ U
(^

_ffi^
Ci

/I

arrfo^ic Jg^ir^i

<=> ^=^ <=>

crz]

VOL. H.

l8

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

/I

^ q
CTZD
I

h
1

r"^ ^^^ r^ tk

^
^!=^^

/.wvv,

0:^^

_M^

:5=

/^^^^l

^^

J^^:^

=9= CUD

^^

s\

^-1^
/wv\^^

JlJr ^

^^/vlvJU

III

n
I

/wwv^

'^


THE FIFTH HOUR
IQ

THE FIFTH HOUR.


II.

From the Leyden Papyrus,

T. 71.

\til::z\ii{]\
Q
030'^.=^
/U-fl
-TL

=:

-^5-

D ^-^^-'''^^

c^n
HAftAAAA

"|M
AAA/\AA
1

_/ J _/-i

Dq
I
1

<=^
1

zi

^=11
^ >

on
^ 1
aaaaaa P''^'"^

fl ]

u A

A/v^AA^

<

A^A^^^

?nr^

r~\^~i

S=3

'^^

;^

^^^r;lrs?^kS^Mf!
/vvwv^
/W>/v^^
'-^

, , I I , I

V^

l,'TiSl^J=->^^5^^

20

THE BOOK OF AM-TIAT

SUMMARY
'^^

"=^
D

kfilikfl=liTS^T4ri^
-^^

^=0 1"c^fl^^PI^I^%^S'i D
Ji^

^*^^
AA/N/W\
/'A^v^AA

Ji

S
^

AA/W^

A^JVNAA

THE SIXTH HOUR.


The majesty
ill

of this great

god taketh
(i.e.,

u\> his

position

tlie

stream of Nebt-mu-tuatiu

the Lord of the

waters of the gods of the Tuat), and

lie

sendcth forth

words
tliat

to the

gods who are

tlierein,

and he commandeth
divine ollcrings
tliis

they have the mastery over

tlieir

in this City.

He makcth
wiili
liis

his

way
and

tlirongh

Field,
l>y

being provided
liis

IJoat,
wliicli

lie settetli

apart

words the estates

are [to
to

]ro<hire]

their
for

oll'orings in this City,

and he giveth

them water

their lakes,

and

hi*

tiavclU'lh through the Tiiat every

day.

Seit-METU

is

the

name

of tlie

door of this City.

THE SIXTH HOUR


Tlie secret roads of
I

21

Amentet, and the manner wherein

his great

god

is

being rowed along over the water

therein in his boat to perform the plans (or, affairs) of

the gods of the Tuat, the gathering together [of them]

by their names, the manifestations of their shapes


forms),
of

(or,

and

[their] secret hours,

such are the things


of the

which the secret representation

Tuat

is

not

known

men and women. AVhosoever shall make


to
is in

[a

copy

of]

this

image in

writing, according to the representation of the

same

which
of the

the hidden things of the Tuat, at the south


shall

Hidden Palace, and whosoever


in the Tuat,

know them

shall be in the condition of


'in

one who awardeth offerings

abundance

and he

shall be united to

the oflerings of the gods


Osiris,

who
(or,

are in the following of

and

liis

parents

kinsfolk) shall

make

the

offerings

which are obligatory on the earth.


of this great

The majesty

god sendeth forth words,


to [the gods of] the Tuat,

and he giveth divine offerings

and he standctli up by them; and they see him, and


they have dominion over their Fields and over the
gifts

made

to

them, and they ellect their transformaof the

tions

by reason

words which

this great

god hath

spoken unto them.

^Ietchet-nkht-Tuatiu
which
is

is

the

name

of this Field,

the road of the Boat of Ra.


is

Mesperit-au-maat
iii-bt

the
this

name
great

of the

hour of the
this

Nvbicli

guideth

god through

country.


22

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY
(lines

THE SIXTH HOUR.


I.

From

tiik Tomij

of Seti

I.

174

210).

q
I

AWV\A
/WWV\

a,

l_l

/vv^Wv

A /vw^\

^AA^^^

7i

^^^^
I

ljr.^^iiimxL!JiiiS^_r
'''"^ ^::J;^ '^^^'^ ^^wwN ^^'^"^ '=^ ^^.^^
I
I

111

Ji

Y\

-^-^
ill

^
[=:31

_B^ <^I>

^<z::7

'^'^'^^

^
1

I'

^/^/1

>g*c:.

/wvwv

^^^

/www 1

J^

-B^

UnJ.

K\l\*\^i\Km\
n'
-

rvn

n^ ^=>

fi

^^^

v.x

8*^1

A/WWA


THE SIXTH HOUR
"^

23

"
_Q
re

^ D

/
I

c=i=i='l

Jl

/WWSA

A^/WV

0^=^

I<=>|
.

I_BJ^

iVJi
J
!

Ui

.wwvA-

^"-^

^'"^
/WWAA '^
I

-CESS _il

^ V^
1

^'"'^
I

A/W^VS

'

ililii )

"=" U /wvw\ If

_1C>^

^H^
<!>

V ^
I

/W\f^/\f\

mm

>^^^*THE SIXTH HOUR.


II.

From the Leyden Tapykus,

T. 71.

^^

Ar^^A/V^

'1
/^^VV^-'v^
I

D
A'WNAA

AAAAAA

^ir^^l^SlTliS^J

24

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

/WVWV

III

^-f

k^ = PJ*^
^^ r-gji
I
I I
I

'

/www

cri^

^
!

n AAAAAA
/W^rW\
'

M
1

'^

A/VAAAA

II

1^
I

k /^U ^T^Ik^mkEX^II
I I

II

/wwv\
I I

_ ^O

'=^- ^^-^
;

"^

'

i^:^ \.

isti^^^^^
/vww\
I

^^^^

^
'^

D
2

AAA/W\

kKliE^^S^k^
crz3

^ nr

7i

-ca^

THE SEVENTH HOUR

25

i3?s!krn >
l^P?kflrT^k
I
I

/WVW^

Jl U III!

4 Jr

III n-^^

!^ cTD ^

7ZZ.

M^ ^^

^-^ ^/wwNA ^nj$ <:: D -Zi ^ /WWSA O

^.O
_B^ .4ii

'^Ir'

THE SEVENTH HOUE.


The majesty
of this great

god taketh

\\\\

liis

position

in the secret place of Osiris,

and

tlie

majesty of this

great god sendeth forth words into this to the gods

who

dwell therein.

This god maketh to himself other


i)lace in

forms for this hidden

order to drive out of his

path the serpent iiend Ai'EP by means of the words of

power

of Isis,

and the words


is

of of

power

of Semsu(?).

IluTi-AsAU

the

name

the gate of this City

through which this god passeth.

Tephet-sheta

is

the

name

of this City.

26

THE BOOK OF Am-TUAT


This great god maketh his

SUMMARY
over
the road of
in it over this

way

Anient in the holy boat, and he passeth


road which
along.
is

without water, without being towed


his

He maketh

way by means
of the

of the
of

words

of of

power

of Isis, and by means Semsu (?), and the utterances

words

power

of this great

god himself

[act as] magical protectors,


of

and perform the slaughters

Apep

in the Tuat, in this Circle, in his windings in

the sky.

Whosoever

shall

make
tlie

[a

copy

of]

these [pictures]

according to the similitudes whicli are in writing at


the northern side uf

Hidden Palace
protectors

in the Tuat,

they shall act as magical

for

him that
whosoever

maketh them

in

heaven and in earth.

And
words

knoweth them
of Isis

sliall

be a soul of souls with Ra.


(i.e.,

And
power

whosoever shall make

recite) tlie
of

of

and

tlie

words

of

power

Semsu, shall make


Wliosotlie

to

be driven back the Apep of lia in Amentet.

ever shall do [this] in the Hidden Palace of

Tuat,

and whosoever
is]

shall do [this]

upon

eartli, [the result

the same.

Whosoever knoweth

this shall be in the


;

Boat

of Efi, l)oth in
iio

heaven and upon earth

but he

that halh

l<niwledge of this representation shall not

know how

to drive

back NEilA-lliiA

(i.e.,

Stinking-Face).
is

Now
it

the ridge of earth of Neija-hiia in the Tuat

four hundred and fifty cubits in length, and he filleth

with the undulations of his body.

The

regions which

belong to him are


great god dulh unt

made (i.e., kept) for him, and the make iiis way vcr liim when he


THE SEVENTH HOUR
maketli him to turn aside out of the
the secret place of Osiris,

27
for him, his

way

from

when
this

this

god maketh

way

through this city in the form of the serpent Meiien.

Whosoever

shall

know

upon

earth, the serpent

Neiia-iira shall not drink his water, and the soul of

him
gods

tliat

knoweth

it

shall nut

l)e

evilly entreated

by the
it

who

arc in this Circle;

and whosoever knoweth


the

the crocodile Ab-shau shall not devour his soul.


KiiESEF-iiAi-iiESEQ-NEiiA-HitA
is

name

of

the

hour uf the night which guideth this great god through


this Circle.

THE SEVENTH HOUR


I.

Fito.M

THE ToMP. OF Seti

I.

(lines

210

21:')).

D
1

JL
^Zj!

.www
'

o X
y

CTZ]

H
"
'

A^
[1 ll

_&
"^

ll

O-

ii"^^'''0 ~jn /www a


^^
'

1'
I I

:^^=^?
'^
I

"

\AA^A^

;WW^\

'^

<wv\AA

LI ID A/VWW

1 1 '^^i -fj^/wvwv

JL|\
IT

III

i^

THE SEVENTH HOUE.


II.

From the Leyden Papyrus,

T. 71.

c^

\-j

/www Xw I

Aw^

/www

J^ J^ D X
IJ

.<2>- rJ

l^^lTli!J.1L!:i^^l

28

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

ii1'i^ik^i^1L!T^^^

^Ili^i^^k^O D^k
_ffi^ /wwvN

/wwv^

J\

/.v.-As

<:ii^ <:ii> _Jl

\\

A/^\AAA

A/WNAft
1 I

iD D """"'JS^^:^<z^O

fBlK^m^k.^l^^liil
t

r-^-^ /WWVA '^^.S'^

^ ^

CrZl

1 AAAAA^

THE SEVENTH HOUR

29

r^] ill!
-f-

^i'^-^kl
^
ooL <==>

:r:

^2

JL X

^,vwvs

is^k/^^^^^

l^k^JC^^'^"^
I

/W\/W\

<C3>

D
'''^^^

-<E>-

_A

AAV^

_B^ ^

/VWWS

_B^

AA/VV\A A/WvAA

1Ei=lf^y^^^i^
I

/I

o >o

30

THE BOOK OF AM-TL'AT

SUMMARY

AAftAAA

Fro^flflSIP,
X.

THE EIGHTH HOUE.


When
his
llie

majesty
in

ff

this y;reat

god

liatli

taken up
are in

p()sitii)ii

the secret Circles of tliosc

who
is

their sand, he sendeth forth


his Boat,

words

to tliem

from out of
in the

and the gods tow along him that


(?) of the serpent
is

holy emlnace

Mehen.
of this City.

Aha-an-ukt-f

the
is

Tebat-neteru-set

name of the gate the name of this


Amextet,
his Ioat, 1iy
in the 'Puat.
[a

City.
this great

As

for the secret Circle of

god

way over it in towing of the gods who are Whosoever shall make
makcth
his

means
these

of the

copy
is

of]

things

according to the similitude which

in writing

on the

north [wall] of the Hidden Palace in the Tuat, and

whosoever shall know them by their names, shall


in

lie

the condition

of

one wlio

is

fully })ro\ided
])e

witli

swathings on the earth, and he shall never


at the secret gates,

repulsed

and he

sliall

have abundant offerings

in the great funeral hall regularly

and unfailingly
hmn'

for

millions of years.

Neht-usha
which guidcth

is

the

name

of

|]ic

.r

ihe night

this great god.

THE EIGHTH HOUR

3I

THE EIGHTH HOUK.


From the Leyden Papyrus,
T. 71.

>-^
<3.

<=^

r-w-i

f^

CZ:>

% fk, n_^ _2fl0 1lllllijl=i:t=f


I

on^^

2^.=^
/wwvv

-^^
H

^'
1
I I

-(J-

^ik^i:r:^Ti^k
^ ^

[-^^-| /wwNA R

Qqi

<=

iQ

n 1 AA./ (iiia -Ki\ H .m i^^T Jf =5^


_

AAA/VAA

_
ili

A A
I

^^^
<rr>
A

-A

1k TPJ*^
"^ n
n
.1

^^^ ri^
I I

'^ <z> V
I

^ n
AAAAA^

^fx

^2

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

<=.

THE NINTH
his position

HOUll.
up

AVlicn the majesty of this great god hath taken


in
this
Circle,

he scndeth forth words


therein,

from his Boat


sailors join the

to the

gods

who dwell

and the
through

Boat

of this great

god in

this City.

Saa-keb
which

is

the

name
is

of the gate of this City


to take

this great

god passcth

up

his position

on

the stream which

in this City.

Bes-aru
secret

is

the
of

name

of

this

City,

which

is

the

Circle

Amentet, wherein
this great
[a

take

up

their

positions in the

Tuat

god and his

sailors.

Whosoever maketh

copy

of]

these things in their

names according

to the similitudes whicli are in writing of the

on the east [wall]

Hidden Palace

of the 'Fuat,

and whosoever knoweth their names upon earth, and

knoweth

their hal)itations in

Amentct, shall rest in his

habitation in the 'Puat, and he shall stand up

among

the lords of the provisions of the gods, and his voice


shall be
of

madt before the ichatcha beings on the day


reckoning
of

the

Tharaoh

(literally,

tlie

thrice

great liouse).
protectors to

Ami
him
is

these tilings shall act as magical

that

knoweth them upon

earth.

Mak-NEI5-s

the

name

of

the hour of (ho night


this Circle.

which guideth

this great

god in

THE NINTH HOUR

33

THE NINTH HOUR.


From the Leyden Papyrus,
I

T. 71.

=1
I

AAArt/W

/W^A/V\

wvvv\

i^

1^

/VWVAA AA/NAAA

AA/WV\

'^

'

^
I I I

'::i

AA/V\AA

/WWA '^

AAAAAA

5^

^ ^

,-il-^ C3

k^^^^Siik
^VWVA
I
I

AAAAAA

^kll=IkffiliTfJ^i7^^
1=3]
I I I

g r^-^

^111
7^

[irz]
f\/^^

^
o - ^
I

ii4>yi^kii^^
eJiiiJ)

O
I

hH HJ

VOL.

II.

34
AAAA/VA

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT


n
^
AAAAA^
' '

SUMMARY

AAAAAA

^ =^ -^^ .^. ^
I I

^
L
.

/WWVS

^O ^
AAA/^^

-=>,

S;^

^1

AAAAAA

'

'^

_Cr^

<^

-*

W'
THE TENTH HOUK.
Tlie majesty of this great
in this Circle,

god

taketli

up

his position
to the gods

and he sendeth forth words


the

wlio are in

it.

Aa-kiieperu-mes-aru
this

is

name

of

the gate of

City through which


is

this great

god passeth.
[This
is]

Metch-qa-utebu

the

name

of this City.

the secret Circle of Amentet whereto Kiiepera joineth

himself before Ra, and the gods, and the spirits, and
the dead cry out from
tions (or, images) of
it

over the secret representa-

Akert.

Whosoever
sentations]

shall

make
to

[a

copy

of]

these

[repre-

according

the

figures

which

are

depicted on the cast [wall] of Anient, and whosoever

knoweth them

l)y

their

names

shall journey

round
it,

about in the Tuat, and shall travel through

and

he shall not be driven back, and he


with
Rfi.
is

sliall

flourish

TEiNTKNIT-hesq-kiiakabu

the

name

of the

hour of

the night which guidcth this great god tlirougli the


secret

ways

of this City.

THE TENTH HOUR

35

THE TENTH HOUR


Fkom the Levpen Papykus,
D
/VVVW\

T. 71.

o=3

A/V\A/\A

1
I

AAAAA^

1^

AAAA/V\

"Emmr

wwv\

**

AAAAAA

n O

<::^

I'

Ci^ci
I

I
I

III

^'^ V
I

CZEZ! .-^'^

vW

AAAAAA

n-^^^

JT

.f^/V^V\

_^
_Cr^

/wwvA AAAAAA

7^ V^

^ X

m ^5
AAA/NAA

^
I

^^
111
I .

7^
I

^.^!
AA/VW\

AAAAAA

^ O

^
1

D
fl

"=^

^1

1 I

=
W
^^^

w
'

AWVSA
'

36

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

THE ELEVENTH HOUR


The majesty
in this Circle,
of this great

god taketh up his position

and he seudeth forth words unto the

gods who are therein,

Sekiiex-Tuatiu

is tlio

name
is

of tlie gate of this City

thruugh which this great god passeth.


EE-EN-gERERT-Ai'T-KiiAT
[This
is]

the

name
Tuat
[lie]

of

tliis

City.
this

the secret Circle of the

into

which

great god passeth on his way, and


at

cometh forth
the eater of

the

eastern
Tlie

mountain

of
is

the

sky,

eternity.

form thereof

in the presence of the

serpent I'etka, whicli dwcUeUi in this City, and they


(i.e.,

the gods) place themselves in the train of


the birth of Kiiepeu upon earth
is

[lla]

when
place.

about to take

Whosoever

shall

make

[a copy] of these [representa-

tions] according to the figures wliich are depicted

on

the east [wall] of the palace of Anient in the hidden


[places]
of in
tlic

Tuat, and whosoever knoweth


position
of
is

tlieni

shall

1)C

the
of

him

tliat

divideth his
is

offering,

and

him who
botli

a spirit

who

suitably

equipped

[to travel]

in lioaven

and upon oavUi,

regularly and unceasingly.

SEBIT-NEB-UAA-KIIESEF-SElUr-E.M-rKKT-F
of the

is

tliO

name

hour

of the nii^ht

which uiiidrth

lliis

great god

in this Circle.

THE ELEVENTH HOUR

37

THE ELEVENTH HOUR.


From the Leyden Tapykus,
T. 71.

C^

LI A/SAAAA

/WNA/V\

VVsAAAA

O
fij

^^ @
ji

s=3 <z=> ^^^ ^

A
I

"^ o

,^A^

/wwvA

_^f^

7i

_M^

cnn]

AAAAAA
/V,/\W\

O ^ O

AA/v/v\A

'^^

^
/vwwv

'

JB^ <=> O

J)

38

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

THE TWELFTH HOUR.


The majesty
this great

of

tliis

great god takctli up his position

iu this Circle at the limits of tlic tliick darkness,

and
and

god

is

born under the form of KilEPEKA in

this Circle.

The gods

Nu

and Am.mui, and

Heh

Heh[ut] are

in this Circle at the birth of this great

god, wlien he maketli his appearance from the Tuat,

and taketh up

liis

i)lacc in

the Matet Boat, and riseth

from between the thighs


TiiENEN-NETERU
is

of the

goddess Nut.
of the gate of this City.

the

name
is

KiiEPEU-KEKUl-KiiA-MESTi
[Tins
is]

the

name
his

of this City.

the secret Circle of the Tuat, wherein this


is

great god

born, wlien he

maketh

appearance in

Nu, and

taketli

up

liis

place in the body of NuT.


[a c(>})y] of these [representa-

Whosoever

shall

make

tions] according to the figures

which are depicted on

the east [wall] of the palace of Anient of the Tuat,


tliey sliall

be magical protectors to
earth, linth in
tlie

him

tliat

knoweth
and

them upon

heaven and on eailh.


it is

At

tliis

point
tlic

light l)eginncth [to come],

the end of

thick

darkness which
of

Ka

travelleth

through

in

Amentet, and

the secret matters wliich

this great

god performed
of

Ihiicin.

Me who halh no
of

knowledge

the

wh(jle(:')

or

part^:')

the secret

THE TWELFTH HOUR


representations of
destruction.

39

the Tuat,

shall

be condemned to

Whosoever
of the

shall

make

[a copy] of these [representais

tions] according to this

copy of what

in the

Ament

Tuat, [which] cannot be looked at or seen, and

whosoever shall know these secret images shall be


in the condition

of

the spirit

who

is

equipped

[for

journeying], and

shall

come

forth

[from]

and

shall

descend into the Tuat, and shall hold converse with


the

men and women who

live

[there]

regularly

and

unfailingly, millions of times.

THE TWELFTH HOUR.


From the Leyden Papyrus,
T. 71.

^
^4lli_Qnl\

^cr^^^^
^
A \

^^^
AWWv

H^^Vx^
\\

vj^i^

i_jL

AVvvvv

_n^

^
(^

LJ

imiiiir

wwv,

<=i

w^w. <rr>

Ja

40

THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT

SUMMARY

Q
I

\-^m
O
AAAAAA
':^
I

D
D
AAAAA^

^
I

<^
I

\^
-^^

Si \\
^^
1
!

^
^^ /v^
1

z=i

Yi ^^^7

D X U
,-^-^

/wwvA

Jr
'^i

^ E
CTTD

^^
'ft*

.Bfvli' II

AVWVA

AAAAAA

_B^

t=^?^

7^

THE BOOK OF GATES

THE BOOK OF GATES


CHAPTER

I.

THE ALABASTEK SAKCOPHAGUS OF SETI


The
text
uf

I.

the
is

"

Book

of

Gates,"
tlie

printed in

the

following pages,
of king Seti
I.,

taken from

alabaster sarcophagus
is

B.C.

1370, which

preserved in the

Museum

of Sir

John Soane,
is,

at 13, Lincoln's

Inn

Fields.

This sarcophagus
authorities
for

undoubtedly, one of
text
of
is

the

chief

the

that

remarkable
to

book
the

but before

any attempt

made

describe

arrangement of the scenes and the inscriptions which

accompany them,
facts connected

it

will be well to recall tlie principal


its

with

discovery by Giovanni Battista

Belzoni,

who has

fortunately placed

them on record

in

his Narrative of the Operations


icithin the iiyramids, temples,

and

recent discoveries

tombs and Excavations


p.

in

Egypt and Nuhia, London, 1820,


the Valley of the

233

ff.

In

October, 1815, Belzoni began to excav^ate in the Biban-

al-Muluk,

i.e.,

Tombs

of the Kings,

on the western bank

of the Nile at Thebes,

and

in tlie

44
bed

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI


of a watercourse lie

I.

found a spot where the ground

bore traces of luiving been "moved."


the montli
liis

On

the 19th of
the sand

workmen made a way through


of

and fragments
there,

stone wliich
first

liad

been piled up

and entered the

corridor or passage of a

magnificent tomb,

w'liieli

he soon discovered to have

been made for one of the great kings of Egypt.

second corridor led him to a square chamber which,


being thirty feet deep, formed a serious obstacle in
the

way

ol

any unauthorized intruder, and served

to

catch any rain-water which might


the corridors from the entrance. are

make
of

its

way down

Beyond
first

this chamlier

two

halls,

and from the

these Belzoni
until

passed through other corridors and rooms


entered
the vaulted

he
the

chamber

in

which
is

stood

sarcophagus.^

The sarcophagus chamber


tlie

situated at
first

a distance of 320 feet from


Cfjrridor,

entrance to the

and

is

180 feet l)elow the level

of the ground.

Belzoni succeeded in l)ringing the sarcophagus from


its

chamber into
due course
it

tlie

light of

day without injury, and


;

in

arrived in England

the negotiations
of
tlie

which he opened with the Trustees

British
fell

Museum,
Soane,

to

whom

its

purchase was

first
it

proposed,
to

through, and he
it is

subsequently sold

Sir

John
cover

said for the

sum

of

2000.
it

An
and
ol"

examinaits

tion of the sarcophagus

shows that both


mitnolllliic

were Iiollowed out


'

of

li](icl<s

alabaster,
discovoiy

Ah

IJclzdiii's iiarnilivc is nl" iiitcri-st, his aci-tMiiit of liis

of

Si'ti'.s

tomb

ia j^ivt'ii

in tin- Aj^K'Hilix to lliia

(Jli!i|itc'r.

DISCOVERY or AND DESCRIPTION


and
it is i)iulal>lo,
iii

45

as

]\Ir.

Sliaipe says,^ tliat these were

quarried

the

iiiouiitaius

near Alaljastronpulis,
to

i.e.,

the district whicli was the

known
J
in
r^;;;j^

the Egyptians by
is

name
tlie

of

Het-niil),

C=C^, and
l)y

situated

near

ruins

known

modern times

the

name

of Tell al-*Amarna.

In the Het-nub quarries large

numl)ers of inscriptions, written chietly in the hieratic


cliaracter,

have been found, and from the interesting

selection

from these

puljlislicd

by Messrs. lilackden
of the

and Fraser, we learn that several kings

Ancient

and Middle Empires carried on works in them, no


doubt fur the purpose of obtaining alabaster for funeral
purposes.

The sarcophagus
and 2 ft. 3
high.

is

ft.

4 in.

lung, 3

ft.

in.

wide, in
shoulders,
1
ft.

the widest part, and


in.

2ft. Sin. high at the


feet
;

at

the

the cover

is

in.

The thickness

of the alabaster varies of

from 2^ to 4 inches.
or even cracking them,

The

skill

the mason

who

succeeded in hollowing the blocks without breaking,


is

marvellous, and the remains

of holes nearly one inch in diameter suggest that the


drill

was

as useful to

him

as the chisel

and mallet in

hollowing out the blocks.


its

When

the sarcophagus and

cover were finally shaped and polished, they were


to

handed over

an artisan who was skilled in cutting


S:c.,

hieroglyphics and figures of the gods,

in stone,

and

both the insides and uutsides were covered by him


' The Alabaster Sarcophagus of Oimeneptliah London, 1864, p. 14.

I.,

King of Egypt.

46

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI

I.

with inscriptions and vignettes and mythological scenes


wliich illustrated them.
l>oth inscriptions

and scenes

were then

filled

in with a kind of paint


of copper,

made from

some preparation
colour of
this
tlio

and the vi^id bluish green


formed a striking
the present time
are

paint

must have

contrast to

lailliaut

whiteness of the alabaster

when
large

fresh

from the quarry.


of cliaracters

At

numbers

and

figures
it still

denuded

of their colour,

and those

in

which

remains are

much
The
texts
late

discoloured by
first to

L(iiul(jn ftg

and

soot.

attempt to describe the contents of the


of Seti
I.

and scenes on the sarcophagus

was the
Uonomi,

Samuel Sbarpe, who,

witli the late Jost^ph

published
epthali
I.,

"The Alabaster Sarcophagus of OimenKing of Egypt," Lmidon, 1(SG4, 4to; the


and
texts.

former was responsible for the letterpress, and the


latter for the plates of scenes

For some

reason whidi

it is

not easy to understand, Mr. Sharpe

decided that the hieroglyphic characters which formed


the

prenomen

of the

king for
"

whom

tlie

sarcophagus was

made were

to be read

Oimcncpthali," a result which


tlie

he obtained by assigning
tlic

phonetic value of
Ijj.

to

hierogly})liic'

sign for Osiris

The
,

jn-oiujnien is

someti mes written

(U
I

^^^^]

(^|f|i^,
Mr. Sliarpe did

MEK-EN-rTAU, or Skti-mkn'-ex-Ptaij.

not, a])]arently, iv.ilizr Ihai both the signs

and

ij|

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
were
to be read " Set,"

47
first

and

lie

gave to the
"

the
;

phonetic value of

A and
"

to the second the value of

he next identified
with
tlie

Aimenepthah
of

or "

Oimenepthah
the

"

AnicMKtpliath

Manetho, and

Cho-

niaepthah uf Eratosthenes, saying, "hence arises the

support to our

reading
I'assing

his

name

(i.e.,

the king's)

Oimenepthah."

over

Mr. Sharpe's further

remarks, which assert that the sarcopliagus was


in the year B.C.

made

1175

(!),

we nmst

consider briefly the


tlie

arrangement

of the texts of
tlie

and scenes upon


its

insides

and outsides
the

sarcophagus and

covers.

On

upper outside edge of the sarcophagus runs a


hieroglyphics which contains speeches

single line of

supposed to be made to the deceased by the four


children of

Horus

this line is in

two

sections, each of

which begins at the right hand side


ends at the
left

of the head,

and

hand

side of the foot.


"

Below

this line

of hieroglyphics are five large scenes, each of

which

is

divided into

three

registers,

between two dotted


represent

and these are enclosed bands which are intended to

the borders of the " Valley of the Other

World."

On

the inside of the sarcophagus are also five


is

scenes, but there

no line

of hieroglyphics

rimning

along the upper edge.

On

the bottom of the sarco-

phagus

is

a finely cut figure of the goddess Nut, and


texts

round and about her are

selected
the
of

from the

Theban Kecension
the inside of

of

the
is

Booh of
a
figure

Dead;

on

the cover

the goddess

Nut, with arms outstretched.

On

the outside of the


48
cover,
ill

'

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI

I.

uddition to the texts wliieli record the


of
tlie

names

and

titles

deceased, are
is

inscribed

two large

scenes, each of
like those inside

which

divided into three registers,

and outside the sarcophagus.


on the upper outside edge reads
:

The

line of text

^ \

tM-\rA
<=

(^

"^"

u
'"

'iY^^iT:^:^^'^"
'::z:^

ys-

fTJ^*J^JkJ^J1^^^Jii MI-llgKiEIOIf'?k o

^
SPEECHES OF THE CHILDREN OF HORUS
49

MOO

AA/VAAA
/VS/VV>A

-;=^

iliii e

"=

em
Iff
8

lo5?

"

riP^jQEi
W

^^Q.
VOL. IL

50

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI

I.

^\

j\

'=^.m.z::z.^^^
AAA/V^A

I"

fSiT):f?dii^o -5^ (cA^^ n t


1
\
AAAA/Vv

01?EI.

Speech

of

Mestha

" I

am

Mestha, I

am

[thy] son,

" "
"

Osiris, king, lord of the

two h\nds, Men-Maat-Ka,

whose word whose word

is

madi, son of the Smi, Seti Mer-en-Ptah,


is

madt, and I have come so that I


those

"

may

be

among

who
Ptali,

protect thee.

make
of

to

" flourish

thy house, which shall be doubly established,


of

"by the command


" himself."

by the command

Ea
(or,

Speech
"

of

Anpu

" I

with) the funeral chest."

am Anpu, who dwelleth in He saith, " Mother


bandages for me,
is

Isis

" "

descendeth

Osiris,

king

Men-Maat-Ea, whose word


worketh against mo."
of

macd, son of the Sun,


is

" Seti

Mer-cn-Ptah, whose word

madi, from him

" that

Speech
"

Tuamatef

" I

am

Tuamatef, I

am

thy

son Horus, I love thee, and I have come to avenge

" thee, Osiris,

upon him that would work

his wicked-

SPEECHES OF THE CHILDREN OF HORUS


"ness upon thee, and
I will set

5I

"for ever, Osiris, king, lord of

him under thy feet the two lands, Menfrom his


(or,

"Maat-Ea, son
" body, "

of

the

Sim,

[proceeding]

loving him, lord of crowns


is

risings) Seti

Mer-en-Ptah, whose word

madt, before the Great

"God."

To be

said

"

Ea

liveth, the Tortoise dieth


of
is

Strong

"are the members

Osiris,

king Meu-Maat-

"Ea, whose word


" them.
" state is " is

madt, for Qebhsennuf guardeth


the Tortoise dieth
!

Ea

liveth,
is

In a sound

he who
is

in the sarcophagus, in a

sound state

he who
of

in the sarcophagus, that is to say, the


is

"son
"

the Sun, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word

madt."

Speech of
" " "

Nut
is

Nut, the great one of Seb, saith

Osiris, king, lord of the

two lands, Men-Maat-Ea,


loveth me, I give unto
(or,

whose word

madt,

who

thee purity on the earth, and splendour

glory)

"in the heavens, and I give unto thee thy head for
" ever."
II.

Speech
is is

of

Nut, who

is

over the

Hennu Boat:

"This

my

son, Osiris,

king,

Men-Maat-Ea, whose
son of Ea, Seti Mer-

"word
" "

madt.

His father Shu loveth him, and his


Osiris,

mother Nut loveth him,


en-Ptah, whose word
is

madt."

Speech

of

Hapi

" I

am

Hapi.

I have

come that

" together for thee


"

"might be among those who protect thee, I bind thy head, [and thy members, smiting

down

for thee thine

enemies beneath thee, and

I give

52
" thee] " "
^

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF
thy head,
is

SETI

I.

Osiris, king,

Men-Maat-Ea, whose

word word

madt, son of Ka, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose

is inadt."

Speech
" I

of

Anpu, the Governor


the Governor of
of

of the divine

honse

am Anpn,

the

divine honse.

" Osiris, "

king, lord
is

the

two lands, Men-Maat-Ka,


Mer-en-Ptah,

whose word whose word


thee,

madt, son of the Sun, [proceeding]


of crowns, Seti

"
"

from his body, the lord


is

madt, the Shennu beings go roinid

"about
" ever."

and thy members remain uninjured,


whose word
" I
is

" Osiris, king, Men-]\Iaat-Pia,

madt

for

Speech
"

of

Qebhsennuf
I

am
thee

thy sun,

have

come that
I

might be among those who

protect

" thee.

gather together for

thy bones, and


I
its

" I
" "

piece together for thee thy limbs.

bring unto
seat in thy

thee

thy heart, and I set


I

it

upon

body.

make

to flourish (or,
tliou

germinate) for thee thy


liv[est] for ever."

"

house after thee, [0

who]

To be
" "
"

said

" Rjl liveth,

the Tortoise

dieth

Let

enter the bones of Osiris, king Men-Maat-Ea, whose

word

is

madt, the son of the Sun, Seti Mer-en-Ptah,


is

whose word
Pure

madt,

let

them enter

into their foundais

" tions.

is

the dead body wliich

in the earth,

"

Supplying the words

^
~

^^ X ^

^^

j!^

'^^

'^^tlio

'^
Caii02)ic jars.

-^

from the Wfll-kiiown ypecch on


THE FIGURE OF NUT
" "

53

and pure are the hones


whose word
is

of

Osms,

kmg Men-Maat-Ra,
!]."

madt, like

Ra

[for ever

On

the hottoni of the sarcophagus

is

a large, fullis

length figure of the goddess Nut,


the form of a

who

depicted in

woman with
Her

her arms ready to embrace


face

the body of the king.

and the lower parts

of

the body below the waist are in profile, but she has a
front chest, front shoulders,

and a front

eye.
foot,
is

Her

feet

are represented as

if

each was a right


toe.
is

and each

only shows the great

One

breast

only shown.

The hair

of the goddess
;

long and

falls

over her back

and shoulders by a bandlet. and a

it is

held in position over her forehead


collar or necklace,

She wears a deep

closely-fitting feather-work tunic

which extends
is

from her breast

to her ankles

the latter

supported

by two shoulder

straps, each of

which

is

fastened with
legs,

a buckle on the shoulder.

She has anklets on her

and bracelets on her

wrists,

and armlets on her arms.

The
both

inscriptions
sides,

which are cut above the head, and at


feet of the goddess contain
tlie

and under the

addresses to the king by the great gods of


extracts from the Boole of the

sky,
:

and

Dead ; they read

54

the sarcophagus of

seti

i.

Inscription on the bottom of the Sarcophagus of


Seti
I.

^ ^^ c^

.e

^^

-<2^

speeches of seb, nut, etc.

55

Inscription on the bottom of the Sahcophagus of


Seti
I.

I.

The words

of Osiris the king, the lord of the


is

two

lands,
lia

Men-Maat-Ea, whose word

madf, the son of


is

(i.e.,

the Sun), Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word


saith, "

madt,
"

who

thou goddess Nut, support thou

me, for I

am

thy son.

Destroy thou

my

defects of

" immobility, together


II.

with those who produce them."


in

saith,
" of "
"

The goddess Nut, who dwelleth "This [is my] son Osiris, the

Het-Hennu,
lord
is

king, the

the

two lands, Men-Maat-Ea, whose word


him, the lord of crowns,

madt, the son of

Ea, [proceeding] from his body,


Osiris,

who

loveth

Seti

"

Mek-en-I'tah."

III. The god See saith, "This [is my] son Men"Maat-Ea, who loveth me. I have given unto him "purity upon earth, and glory in heaven, him the " Osiris, king, the lord of the two lands, Men-Maat-Ea,

"

whose word
is

is

madt, the son of Ea, the lover of Nut,

"that
"

to

say, Seti

Mer-en-Ptah, whose word


""Puat."
:

is

madf, before the lords of the

IV.

Words which

are to be said

"

Osiris, king,
is

" lord of "

the two lands,

Men-Maat-Ea, whose word


is

madf, the son of Ea, [proceeding] from his body, that

"is to say, Seti


"

Mer-en-Ptah, whose word


forth [her]

madf.

Thy mother Nut putteth

two hands and

"arms over
"

thee, Osiris, king, lord of the


is

two

lands,

Men-Maat-Ea, whose word

madf, son of

Ea,

56

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI

AAAAAA

IT
I
I

(MIEI
I I
I I

w
crz\

^ o

j\

^^,(2iiil^]

7^

fit

in krrvis^ikrii^^
^ o
"
1

^^;:^a

SPEECH OF NUT
"wlioiii

57 Seti

he loveth, lord

of

diadems,

Mek-en-

"Ptah,

whose "hath added the magical powers wliich are thiue, "and thou art in her arms, and thou shalt never
is

word

madt.

Thy mother NuT

"die.

Lifted up and driven


to

away
never

are the calamities


shall

"which were

thee,

and they
shall

never [more]

"come

to

thee,

and

draw nigh

unto

"thee, Osiris, king, the lord of the two lands, Men"Maat-Ra, whose word is madt. Horus hath taken

"up
"of
"

his

stand behind
Seti

thee,

Osiris,

son of Ea, lord

diadems,

Mek-en-Ptaii,

whose

word

is

"madt, for thy mother


she hath purified
to
(or,

Nut
hath

hath come unto thee;


a

washed) thee, she hath united


supplied
thee
as

"herself

thee,

she

"od, and
" gods."'

thou art alive

and stablished among the

V. The great goddess


"

Xut

saith, " I

have endowed

him with a soul, I have endowed him with a spirit, "and I have given him power in the body of his "mother Tefnut, I who was never brought forth. I
"have come, and
"
"

have united

myself

to

Osmis,

the king, the lord of the two

lands,

Men-Maat-Ea,
the lord
is

whose word

is

madt, the son of

Pta,

of

"diadems, Seti Mer-en-Ptati, whose word

viadt,

"with
"die.

life,

stability,

and

power.

He

shall
I

not
took

am Nut
in
of

of

the mighty heart, and


of

"up my being "in my name

the body

Nut; over

my mother Tefnut my mother none hath

58

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF

SETI

I.

B
9
A/V\AAA

^|?^k^o^^:r:^^
/WAAA
I
I
I I I

_ZIr\S /^/V^^^

/I

ll

It

OR

V^

W
T=T

35

QUI
I I
I

(SMlil
(3
III

III

-^^^^.Afllil'^''^ /vvvvv\
II
I

II

A/V\AAA

^ni

"

BOOK OF THE DEAD


" gained the mastery.
" beneficence, " I

CHAPTER

LXXII.

59

I have filled every place with

my

and

have led captive the whole earth

have led captive the South and the North, and I

"
"

have gathered together the things which are into

my
two

arms
from

to vivify Osiris, the king, tlie lord of the

" lands, " "

Men-Maat-Ra,

the son of the Sun, [proceeding]

his body, the lover of Seker, the lord of diadems,


is

the governor whose heart

glad, Seti Mer-ex-Ptaii,


live for ever
!

"

whose word

is

madt.

His soul shall

VI. ["Nut,"] saith Osiris, the king Men-Maat-Ea,

whose word
"

is

madt,

"

Raise thou

me up
is

am

[thy]

"son, set thou free


that wliieh

him whose heart


[it

at rest

from

maketh

to be still]."

VII. Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands,

Mex-Maat-Ra, whose word

is

madt, the son of the

Sun, loving him, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, saith the

Chapter of Coming Forth by Day and of Making a AVay Through Ammehet.^


Saith Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands,

Men-

Maat-Ra, whose word

is

madt, the son of the Sun, [pro-

ceeding] from his body, loving him, the lord of crowns,

Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word


" you,

is

madt,

"

Homage

to

ye lords of madt, wlio are free from iniquity,


exist

"who
" " is
"

and

live for ever

and

to the double henti

period of everlastingness,

Men-Maat-Ra, whose word

madt, the son of the Sun, [proceeding] from his body,


liiin,

loving

the lord of diadems, Seti Mer-en-Ptah,


Chapter LXXII. of the Book of the Dead.

'

This

is

6o

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI

I.

-^5==.

r~w~i
1

D
AA/v^A^ /\A/VW\

QUI
w

AWV\^

^
I I

^^^
I I I

1
I I I

?1J1fl
<?

cn^^
^
^ ^
Q

rK

^^
X

fl

Tnnmr

s==5

.^ju. s.

Q s=>

v*^ A

VA ^^

aaaaaJ c=-c>

-^^

o=D

=0=111

BOOK OF THE DEAD


"

CHAPTER

LXXII.

6l

whose

word

is

madt,

before

you hath become a

" khic "

(i.e.,

a spirit) in his attributes, he hath gained

the mastery

through his words of power, and he


his

"is

laden

with

splendours.

deliver

ye the

" Osiris,
"

the king, the lord of


is

the

two lands, Men-

Maat-Ea, whose word


lord
is

madt, the son of the sun,

"the

of

diadems,

Seti

Mer-en-Ptah,

whose

"word
"Maati.
" with.

madt, from the Crocodile of this Pool of

He

hath his mouth,

let

him speak

there-

Let there be granted unto him broad-handedI

"ness in your presence, because

know

you, and I

"know your names.


"whose
nostrils
is

know

this

great god
of

unto

ye

present

offerings

tchefau.

"Rekem
" the

his

name.
of

He maketh
heaven.
is

way through

eastern horizon
I also depart;

PtEKEM departeth

"and
"
let

he

strong and I

am

strong.

me

not be destroyed in the ]\Iesqet Chamber.


fiends

"Let not the Sebau


"me.
" the

gain

the

mastery over
your
Gates,
Osiris,

Drive

not

ye

mc
your
of

away from
two

"and shut not


king,

fast

arms against the

the

lord
is

the

lands, Men-]\Iaat-

"Ra, whose word


"ceed?ug]

madt, the son of the Sun, [proof

from his body, loving him, the lord


is

"diadems, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word

madt,

"because [my] bread


" ale is

is

in

the city of Pe,^ and

my

in the city of Tep,

and

my

arms are united

'

Pe and Tep formed a double

city in the Delta.

62

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF

SETI

I.

D
r^"n
II

/WSAAA

cz>

\>
"ill

otib

w r

()5it>

^
AA/Vv\A

^D <r=>

II

Q Q Q

s^i-fiM;fi:k?^5

^AAAA^

o QUI
X
n /W^TJV^
'^

AAAAAA a;^_^

ra

BOOK OF THE DEAD


" in

CHAPTER
me
is

LXXII,

63

the divine house which

my

father hath given nnto

" me.

He

hath stablished for

a house in the high

"place of the lands, and


" therein, tlic quantity of
" of

tlierc

are wheat and barley

which

unknown.
that
all

The son
Grant
to

my

body acteth

for

me

there as hher-hch}
offerings,
is

"ye unto me sepulchral


" incense,

say,

and merhet unguent, and


of

beautiful and

"pure things
" Osiris,

every kind whereon

tlie

God
is

liveth.

the king, ]\Ien-Maat-1Ia, whoso word


tlie

madt,

" the

son of

Sun, [proceeding] from his body, loving


of diadems, the ruler of joy of heart,
is

"him, the lord


" " ever
"

Seti Mek-en-Ptaij, whose word


in
all

madt, existcth for


it

the

transformations whicli

pleaseth

[him to make].

He

floateth

down

the river, he saileth

"up
" I

into Sekhet-Aaeu," he reacheth Sekiiet-^Ietep.'^

am

the double Lion-god."

VIII. Saith Osiris, the king, the lord of the two


lands,

Men-Maat-Ra, whose word

is

madt, son of the


is

Sun, loving him, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word

madt
"
" "
''

"

ward

off that

destroyer from

my

father

" Osiris, the king, the lord of the

two lands, Men-MaatStrengthen

Ea, whose word


be under

is maclt,

and
let

let his divine protection

my

legs,

and

them

live.

thou

Osiris,

son of the Sun, lord of diadems, Seti

MeeGrasp
let

en-Ptaii, whose

word

is

madt, with thy hand.


let

"

thou bim with thy hand,


'

him enter thy hand,


who read

The kher-heb was the


I.e.,
I.e.,

priestly official
=*

the funeral sei'vicc.

="

the Field of Reeds.

I.e.,

the Field of Peace.

Shu and Tefnut.

64

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF

SETI

I.

^^
^

ni]

\\

C3

^^

Q
^^---^

.=^ <=^

oil

'

<c:^

'

rv/\^

ij

^J
7^

j>

srT\

(Ik

j^Zi.^i^j^^-^
AAAAAA
^^^z::^

^ff3^^
s

^VI^P^^P^^^LL'IE
^ w
r-

ktliT4'lkJ^

BOOK OF THE DEAD CHAPTER LXXXIX.


"

05

" lands, "


" "

him enter thy hand, Osiris, king, lord of the two Men-Maat-Ea, whose word is madt, thou shalt not perish. Nut cometh unto thee, and she fashioneth thee as the Great Fashioner, and thou shalt never
decay
;

she

fashioneth thee, she turneth thy weakstrength,

"ness

into

she

gathereth

together

thy

" meml:)ers,

she hringeth thy heart into thy body, and

" she liath placed thee at the


"

head

of the living doubles

{kau),

()

Osiris, king, lord of the


is

two lands, Men-

"

Maat-Ra, whose word


IX. Saith
Osiris,

madt, before the beautiful

" god,

the lord of Ta-Tghesekt." the


king,

the

lord
is

of

the

two

lands,

Men-Maat-Ra, whose word

madt, the son of

the Sun, [proceeding] from his body, loving him, the


lord of diadems, Seti Meij-en-1'tah,

whose word

is

viadt,

[The Chapter of Causing the Soul to be United


TO ITS Body in the Undekwokld]
" "
^

Hail, ye gods

who bring (Anniu)


!

[Hail] ye gods
in

who run (Pehiu)


come unto me

[Hail]

thou who dwellest

" his "

embrace, thou great god, grant thou that

my

soul from wheresoever


let

it

may may be.

" If it "
" "

would delay, then


it

my

soul be brought unto

me from wheresoever
the

may

be, for

thou shalt find


like
lie

Eye

of

Horus
If
it

standing
lie

by thee
let
it

tliose

watchful gods.

down,
Let

down

in

"Annu

(Heliopolis), the land

where

[souls are joined

" to their bodies] in

thousands.

my soul

be brought

'

This

is

Chaiitor

LXXXIX.

of the Book of the Dead.

VOL.

II.

66

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF

SETI

K\:r\

W
PI

\\

^=5 i=^

fe\^

III

IfilVI^
^
I

III

D
/i\

Ill

Ail.

iirzg^'^^ ^-^^ ^=:

will
n

A.

^
I

^x\

(^

t|

AAAAA^

^ w
N\N\N\
I I I

-/J

m ^D?

Ql
-<2::^

^,-

-<S=^


BOOK OF THE DEAD

CHAPTER
it

LXXXIX.

67
thou
soul.

"unto me from wheresoever


"strong,

ma}- be.

Make

guardian of sky and earth, this

my

"If

it

Nvouhl tarry, do thou cause the soul to see its

" )>oily,

and thou
ye gods

slialt find

the Eye of Horus standing

"

by thee even as do those [gods who watch]."


" Hail,

" millions of years,


" of

the

who tow along the l>oat of the lord of who bring [it] into the upper regions Tuat, who make it to pass over Nut, and who
its

"

make

the soul to enter into

sdhu

(i.e.,

spiritual body),

"let your hands be full of weapons, and grasp


" "

them
and

and make them sharp, and hold chains


destroy the serpent enemy.

in

readmess to
rejoice,

Let the l>oat

"let the great god pass on in i)eace, and Ijehold, grant

"ye that the soul


"

of Osiris,

king Men-Maat-Ea, whose


the thighs [of Nut] in

word
X.

is

madt,

may emerge from

" the eastern horizon of

heaven, for ever and for ever."

Osiris, the king, the lord of the

two
is

lands,

Men-

Maat-Ra

Setep-[en]-Ra, whose word

viadt, the son

of Ra, loving rTAH-SEKiti, the lord

of diadems, Seti

]\lEi{-EN-PTAn,
"

whose word

is

vi((dt,

saith

"

ye
not

aheiinu beings, go ye roinid behind me,

and

let

"these

my members

be witliout strength."

XI. Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands,


]\lAAT-liA

Men-

Aa-Ra, whose word

is

madt, the son of the

sun, [proceeding] from his body, loving him, lord of

diadems, Seti Mei;-kn-1'taij, saith


"

"

Nut,

lift

tbou

)o away from me that which am lliy son. " maketii me to be without motion." [Nut saith] "O (Jsiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, Men-

me

up.

68

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI

I.

Cai] y g^ fe^ CSIM3 1


Ql

(SllMZls

(2

PRAYERS OF SETI
"

T.

6g
(ho son
of

^MaaT-IIa

.\a-1iA, wluKse
[jtrocecdiiiul

word

is

ntaaf,
IhmIv,

"the sun,
"the
hiid
is

I'loiii

liis

Iunjul!,

him,

of
iiiadf,

(liadoins,

Si>:ti

AfEi;-KN-l'TAn,
tliy

whoso
to

"word
"
" "

liavo
all

given thee
the

head

be
is

on thy body, and

members
is

of

him

that

Seti Mek-ex-Ptah, wliose word


lack strength."

mr7t, sliall

never

On

the outside of

tlie

cover, beneath the


tlie

two scenes
it,

and texts which occupied


liorizontal line of

upper part

of

was a

hieroglyphics which contained two


l>y

short speeches, the one

the goddess Nut, and the


of

other by Thoth.
of of

The speech
that
(see

Nut

v.,

is

a duplicate

the opening lines of


the

found on the bottom


p.

sarcophagus
of

above

55);

the

speech

Thoth
little

is

much

mutilated,

and can have

contained

except the promise to be with the

king, and a repetition of the royal

On

the
of

inside

of

the cover were


identical,

tions

wliich

are

as
tlie

name and titles. many porwe see from the


texts,
tlie

fragments which remain, with


Boole of
tlie

Chapters from the

Dead which

are found on the Ijottom of

sarcophagus, and which have been transcribed above.

At each who
is

side of the figure of the

winged goddess which


god Tlioth,

was cut on the breast was a


seen

figure of the

holding

staff

surmounted

by

the

symbol

of "night," ^^f^.

AVheii the cover was com-

plete there were probably four such figures

upon

it,

and the texts which accompanied them were, no doubt,

70

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI


('li;i])tci'

I.

identical witli those fduml in


Ihiuk of thr Dead.
Tiie scenes

(T.XI. of the

and inscriptions which cover


of

tlie

inside

and outside
transcribed in

the sarcophagus

are

described

and

tlie

following chapters.

71

APPENDIX TO CHAPTER

I.

BELZONI'S ACCOUNT OF HIS DISCOVERY OF THE TOMB OF SETI I.


"

On

the 16th (of October) I

recommenced

my

cxcava-

" tions in

the Valley of Beban el jMalook, and pointed

" " "

out the fortunate spot, which has paid


trouble I took in

my

researches.

me for all the may call this a

fortunate day, one of the best perhaps of

my
me
;

life

" I

do not mean to say, that fortune has made

rich,

" for I " "


"

do not consider

all rich

men
:

fortunate

but she

has given

me

that satisfaction, that extreme pleasure,

which

wealth

cannot

purchase

the

pleasure

of

discovering what has been long sought in vain, and

" of "

presenting the
of

world with a new and perfect


anticpiity,

monument
as

Egyptian
superior
to

which
in

can
})()int
if

be
of

"recorded

any

other

"grandeur, style, and preservation, appearing as


" finished

just

on the day we entered

it

and what
all

found
others.

"in
"
"

it

will

show

its

great superiority to
last

Not

fifteen yards

from the

tomb

I described, I

caused the earth to be opened at the foot of a steep

" hill,

and under a

torrent, which,

when

it rains,

pours
I

"

gi-eat

quantity of water over the very spot

have

72
"caused
" ancient
" "
"

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF
to

SETI

I.

be dug.

Xo

one could imagine, that the


the

Egyptians would make

entrance into

such an immense and superb excavation just imder a


torrent of water
that tliere was a
;

l)ut I

had strong reasons


in that place,

to suppose,

tomb
in

from indications

" I

had observed

my

pursuit.
all

The Fellahs who


of

"

were accustomed to dig were

opinion, that

"there was nothing in that spot, as the situation of


" this "

tomb

dittered

from that

of

any

other.

I con-

tinned the work, however, and the next day,


the evening

the

" 17th, in

we perceived the

part of the

"
"

rock that was cut, and formed the entrance.


18th, early in the morning, the task

On

the

was resumed,
entrance,
of

"and about noon the workmen reached the


"

which was eighteen

feet

below the surface


indicated,
still

the

"ground.
"

The appearance
;

that the

tomb

was

of tlie first rate

but

did not expect to

" find

such a one as
till

it

really proved to be.


it

The Fellahs

"

ad\'anced

they saw that

was probably a large

"
"

tomb, when they protested they could go no further,


the

tomb was
tliey

so

much choked up with


not get out
of
i)lace, pointetl

large stones,
I

"which
"

could

the passage.

descended, examined the

out to them

" "
"

where they might

dig,

and

in

an hour there was

room enough
the earth

for

me
left

to enter

through a passage that


of
ft.

had

under the ceiling


2
in.

the

first

" corridor,

which

is

?t(j ft.

long,

and 8
G

8 9

in.

wide,
high,

"

and,

when

cleared

of

the

ruins,

ft.

in.

" I

perceived

immediately by the

painting

on

the

BELZONI'S NARRATIVE OF ITS DISCOVERY


"ceiling,

J^

and by the

liicioglyphics

in

Imsso relievo,

"which

were to be seen wlieio (he earth (hd not rcacli,

"that this was the entrance intn a hirg and niagniti-

"cent tomb.
" staircase

At
ft.

the ew\ of this corridor I


long,

came

to a

23

and
at

of the

same

l)readth as the
is

"corridor.
"

The door
37
as

the

bottom

12ft.

high.

From
height

the foot of the staircase I entered another


ft.

" corridor, "

in. long,

and

of the

same width and


sculptured
painted.

the
in
is

other,

each

side

with

"

hieroglyphics
also

hasso

relievo,

and

The

" ceiling

finely

painted,

and in pretty good

" preservation.

The more
anxiety at

I saw, the

more

I
;

was eager
but I was

" to see,
"

such being the nature of

man

checked in

my

tliis

time, for at the end of


pit,
ft.

" this "

passage I reached a large


progress.

wliich intercepted

my

This pit

is

30

deep,

and 14 ft. by
of

"12
"

ft.

in.

wide.

The

upper part

the pit

is

adorned with

figures,

from the wall

of

the passage

"

up

to the ceiling.

" all " of " of " " " "

the

way

to this pit

The passages from the entrance have an inclination downward

an angle of eighteen degrees.

On
in.

the opposite side

the pit facing the entrance I perceived a small


ft.

aperture 2

wide and 2

ft.

high,

and at the

bottom

of

the wall a quantity of rubbish.

rope

fastened to a })iece of wood, that was laid across the

passage against the projections wliich formed a kind

" of door,

appears to have been used by the ancients


the pit
;

" for
"

descending into

and from the small

aperture on the opposite side hung another, which

74

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF
Ix
it

SETI

I.

"reached the
"

torn,

no douljt

lor

the

purpose of

ascending.

AVe eonld clearly perceive, that the water

" wliich
"

entered the ])assages from the torrents of rain


pit,

ran into this

and

tlie

" it

crumbled

to dust on

wood and rope fastened to touching them. At the


of

" "
" " "

bottom

of the pit

were several pieces


it,

wood, placed

against the side of

so as to assist the person


I

who
saw
Mr.

was

to ascend

by the rope into the aperture.*

the impossibility of proceeding at the moment.

Beechey,

who

that day came from Luxor, entered the

"

tomb, but was also disappointed.


"

The next

day, the 19th, by


in sending a
to

means
u})

of a long

beam

" "
" "

we succeeded we

man

into the aperture,

and having contrived


crossed the
pit.

make a bridge of two beams, The little aperture we found to


through a wall,
that had

be an

ojjening

forced

" entirely closed "

the entrance, which was as large as


closely shut
it
it

the corridor.
tlie

The Egyptians had


pit, so

up,

" })lastered " of

wall over, and painted

like the rest

the sides of the

that but for the aperture,


to suppose, that there

" it

would have been impossible


any
further
jiroceeding;

"was
" "
"

and

anyone would
pit.

conclude, that the

tomb ended with the

The
but

rope in the inside of the wall did not

fall to dust,

remained pretty strong, the water not having reached

"it at all; and the


" in

wood

to whic-h

it

was attached was


to this

good preservation.

It

was owing

method
observed

"of keeping the


"

damp

out of the inner parts of the


I

tomlj, that they are so well preserved.

p.elzoni'r nakrative

of
ol"

its

discovekv
Init

75

".some cavities at the Ituttnni


" nothiniTj
in
thciii,

the well,

found
the

nor any eoiniiuiiiication


])lace
;

I'rctiii

"Itottom to any other


"doulit their being
"

therefore

we eouM not
moun-

made
is

to

receive the waters from

the rain, which happens occasionally in this

" tain.
" "

The

valley

so

which the water

carries

that the entrance into

much raised by the rubbish, down from the upper parts, these tombs is become much
;

"

lower than the torrents


its

in consequence, the water

" finds

way

into

the

tombs, some of which are

" entirely
" " "

choked up with earth.

When we
ft.

had passed through the


which were four

little
ft.

aperture
6 in.

we found
25

ourselves in a beautiful hall, 27


in
pillars 3

by

10

in.,

ft.

square.
till

" I shall
"

not give any description of the painting,

have described the whole of the chambers.

At

the

" "
"

end

of this

room, which I
is

call

the entrance-hall, and

opposite the aperture,


three
steps

a large door, from which


into

lead
is

down
ft.

a chamber
ft.

witli

two

" pillars. "


"

This

28

2 in. ])y 25
I

G in.

The

pillars

are 3

ft.

10

in.
;

square.

gave

it

the

name
figures,

of the

drawing-room

for it is covered

with

which,

" "

though only outlined, are so

fine

and

perfect, that

you would think they had


Returning into
left

" before.

drawn only the day the entrance-hall, we saw


lieen

"

on the

of the

aperture a large staircase, which


It steps.
ft.

"descended into a corridor.


" 7 ft. 6 in. wide,
"

is

13ft. 4 in.

long,

and has 18

At

the bottom

we
in.

entered a beautiful corridor, 36

Gin. by Gft. 11

76
"

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI


jM'i'crived that the ])ainlin,us

I.

AVo

hecaiuo im>iv jicrlVet


the
iiiterinr.

"as we

ad\-aiiced

farther

iutn

Tlicy

"retained their ^loss, or a kind of varnish over the


"colours, which had a beautiful eftect.

The

figures are
this

"painted
"corridor

on a white ground.

At
ft.

the end of
wliich I
in.

we descended ten we entered


to

steps,

call
ft.

the
Sin.

"small
" "

stairs, into

another, 17

hy 10
ft.

From
13
ft.

this

a small chamber, 20

in.

by
of

in.,
;

which

gave the name of the

Room

"

Beauties

for it is

adorned with the most beautiful


the
rest,

" figures in hasso relievo, like all "


" "

and painted.
Egyptian

When

standing in the centre of this chamber, the


is

traveller

surrounded by an assembly
Din. by 26

of

gods and goddesses.


large hall, 27
ft.

Proceeding farther, we entered


ft.

"a
" "

10

in.

In this hall

"are two rows of square

pillars,

three on each side of

the entrance, forming a line with the corridors.

At
left

each side of this hall


is

is

a small
ft.

chamber
in.,

that on the

"right

10
in.

ft.

in.
ft.

by 8
9^
in.

that on the
I

"10
"
"

ft.

by 8
;

This hall

termed the
right,
of
Isis'
I

Hall of Pillars

the

little

room on the
is

Room,
the

as in

it

a large cow

]ainted,

which

"shall gi\'e a description hereafter; that on the


"

left,

Room

of Mysteries,

from the mysterious

figures

" it

exhibits.

At

the (^id of this hall

we entered
by a step

a
is

"large saloon, with an arched roof or ceiling, which

"separated from the Hall

of

Pillars only

"so that the two


"is 81
ft.

may

be reckoned one.

The saloon
is

10

in.

by 27ft.

On

the

right

a small

BELZONI

NARRATIVE OF ITS DISCOVERY


in
it,

^"J

"chamber without anything


" unfinished, "

roughly cut, as
;

if

and without

])ainting

on the

left
ft.

we
8
in.

entered a chamber with two S(|uare piUars, 25


22ft. 10 in.

"by
" all

This I called the Sideboard Room,


ft.

" as it

has a j)rojection of 3

in

form

of a sideboard

round, ^^hich was perhaps intended to contain the


necessary
for

" articles

the

funeral

ceremony.

The

"pillars are oft. 4


"

in. s(|uare,

and the whole beautifully

painted as

tlie

rest.

At

the same end of the room,

"and
"

facing the Hall of Pillars,

we entered
is

liy

a large

"door into another ehambcr with four

pillars,

one of

which
ft.

is

fallen
;

down.

This chamber
ft.

43
It

ft.

in.

by

"17
"

in.

the pillars 3

7 in. scj^uare.

is

covered
not cut

with white plaster, where


smoothly, but there
is

the

rock
it.

did
I

"
"

no painting on

named

it

we found the carcass embalmed with asphaltum and also, " scattered in various places, an immense (|uantity of " small wooden figures of mummies 6 or 8 in. long, "and covered with asphaltum to preserve them.
the Bull's, or Apis' Room, as
" of

a bull in

it,

"There were some other


" coloured blue,
" of

figures of fine

earth baked,

and strongly varnished.

On

each side

the two little rooms were wooden statues standing

" erect,

ft.

high, with a circular hollow inside, as


roll

if

to

"contain a
"

of

papyrus, which I have

no doubt
of

they did.

AVe found likewise fragments

other

" statues of
"

wood and

of composition.
of

But the description

what we found

in the centre
till

" of

the saloon, and which I have reserved

this place,

78
" " "

THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI

I.

merits the most particular attention, not having

its

equal in the world, and being such as

we had no
7
in.

idea

could exist.
9
is

It
ft.

is

a sarcophagus of the finest oriental


long,

" alabaster, "

5 in.

and 3
it is

ft.

wide.

Its

thickness
is

only 2
in

in.,

and

transparent,
it.

when

" light

i)laced

the inside of

It

is

minutely

"

sculptured within and without with several hundred

" figures,

which do not

exceed

2 in.

in height,
of

and

"represent,

as I suppose,

the whole

the funeral

"procession and ceremonies relating to the deceased,


" luiited
"

with several emblems, &c.

cannot give an

adequate idea of this beautiful and iuMiluable piece

" of antiquity, " "


"

and can only


Tlie cover

say, that

nothing has been


l)e

brought into Europe from Egypt that can


pared with
it.

coni-

was not there;

it

had been

taken out, and Ijroken into several pieces, which we

"
"

found in digging before

the

first

entrance.
tlie

The

sarcophagus was over a staircase in

centre ol the

"saloon,
" passage, "
" "

which communicated with a subterraneous


leading downwards, 300
ft.

in length.

At

the

end

of this passage

we found
it

a great quantity of bats'

dung, which choked

up, so that
It

farther without digging.

was nearly

" "

by the

falling in of the u])per ])art.


is

we could go no filled up too One liundred feet


;

from the entrance

a staircase; in good preservation


its sul)stance,
a,

" liut tlic

rock l)elow changes

from a beau-

"lif\il
"

snlid calcarcMMis stone, l)CComing

kind of bhick
Ijy

rotten slate, wliich crumbles into chist only

touching.

'This subterraneous passage proceeds in a soutli-west

BENZONI
"direction
" distance

NARRATIVE OF ITS DISCOVERY


the

79
the

througli

mountain.

measured

from the entrance, and also the rocks above,


lialfway

"and found that the passage reaches nearly


"

through the mountain to the upper part

of the valley.

" I
" to

have reasons

to suppose, that this passage


;

was used
l)ut this

come

into the toml) l)y another entrance

"could not be after the death of the person who was


" l)uried
" " "

there, for

at

the bottom of the stairs just a


wall

under

the

sarcophagus

was

built,

which

entirely closed the connnunication between the toml)

and the subterraneous passage.

Some

large blocks of

" stone
" level " "
"

were placed under the sarcophagus horizontally,


with the pavement of the saloon, that no one
percei\'e

might

any

stairs

or subterranean

passage

was

there.

The doorway

of the sideboard

room had
in the

been walled up, and forced open, as we found the


stones with which
it

"

was shut, and the mortar

"jambs.
"
"

The

staircase of the entrance-hall

had been
filled

walled up also at the bottom, and the space

with rul)bish, and the

floor

covered with large blocks

" of stone, so as to
"
"

deceive any one

the fallen wall near the pit,


that the

who should force and make him suppose,

" "

tomb ended with the entrance-hall and the I am inclined to believe, that whoever forced all these passages must have had some
drawing-room.

who were well acquainted with the "tomb throughout. The tomb faces the north-east, "and the direction of the wliole runs straight soulli"spies with them,
"

west."

8o

CHAPTER

II.

THE ANTE-CHAMBER OF THE TUAT.


In
tlie

Fn;.ST Division of ilie "UiM.k of (4ates of the


aec'onliiiy;
(if

Tuat,"
I

tn

the saicojtliaguw of Seti

I.,

we

see

lie
,

lioi'izoii

the west, or the mountain of the west,


,

C:=l

divided into two parts, Q= d2


is

and the boat

of the

sun

supposed to

sail

between

tliem,

and

to enter
is

by

this passage into the Tuat.

On

the right hand

fixed

a jackal -headed standard, and on each side of a bearded god; one god
is

it

kneels

called 'Pat,
is

and

is

a personification of the region wliich

lieyond

the day, and the other 8et,


funeral mountain.

^
it

and represents the


is

On
is

the left hand

a ram-headed

standard, and on each side of

also kneels a bearded


Set.

god

as before, one

called

Tat and the other

The ram's
symbol

liead has the liori/oiital,

wavy

horns, wiiicli

belong to the particular species of ram that was the


of the

god Khnenni

this

animal disappeared
tradition

from Egypt
of

l)efore tlie

Xllth Dynasty, but the


ff

him

rcmaincil.

In the iiiiddh;
'\'\\v

the scene sails the

boat of the sun.

god
is

is

s}

inbolized

by a beetle

within a disk, which

cn\clopcd in

the folds of a

IS

n
f
I
w
ra(-

Vvil.lU-lllJ,

il:i5il!f-|ll
:c

{-Si

U
VOL.

"^^Ia ^^
II.


82
serpeiil

THE ANTE-CHAMBER OF THE TUAT


lia\

iug

its

iail

in

ils

iiiouLh.

lii

the

bows
is

stands the ,uod of divine intelligence, whose


Sa,

name

^^,

and

ill

Iho

sl(>rii,

near the twn ])addles, stands


of

Heka, Jj,

i.e.,

Iht;

persoiiificatiou

the

word

of

power, or of magical utterance.

The

go<l wlio nsuall}'

accompanies Sa

is

Hr.

The
D

text which refers to the

Sun -god reads


fl

O
I I

A^^W\A

qi
AAA/W\

/VWV\^

=^-:\i\^\
I I

-M

AA/NAAA /Vn/VW\
/\A/VV\A

^ ^ ^

AAAAAA

/v^vvJa

r/vj-rj-

-y-

II AA/V\AA

' "^
I i i

di

(IQ-Q.

A/V\AAA
I I I

<C_->
rwvvs/\

11
J
I

*fv

_Zr /wwv^

_M^ GE^
:

A^
forth

" Efi saith

unto the Alountain

Send

liglit,

"

Mountain

Let radiance arise from


slain

tliat wliich liath

"devoured me, and which hath

men and
Uri^ith
to

is

Idled

"with the slaughter


"

of

the gods.
liglit

you,

yc who dwell

ill

tlic

in

your

lialiitatioiis,

my

DliM-C^il^fjiflttf^

;:y:^


84

THE ANTE-CHAMBER HE THE TUAT


shall

" spleiulouvs

be

to

y(ju.

have decreed their


everythin<i;

"slaugliter,

and

they have
1

slaup^htered
}'()U

"which existeth. " are upon the earth, restoring the crown (or, tiara) " those who are on the Mountain. The gods say
'"Let this jackal -headed sceptre
" of this great
"

haw^ liidden

from those who


to

emit the words

god who joineth together his members.


us,

Come then unto


!

thou from

whom we
thou

have come

" forth "

Cries of joy are to thee,

who

art in

thy disk, thou great god whose forms (or transformaare


manifold.'

" tions)

Their provisions [consist] of

"

bread-cakes and beer."

The paragraph below the abo\e


duplicate of
it,

text

is

practically a

but

it

contains no mention of either the

jackal-headed or

the
it

ram-headed sceptre, and


here.

it

is

unnecessary to give

On
called

the right of the boat stand twelve gods,

who
"^
,

are
aiul

"gods

of

the

mountain,"
:

\\\ J]

the text referring to

them reads

^
|

f;iiiiiii

tt

[~]

/VV\AAA

i_J

A^yWV\

(J


THE TWENTY-FOUR GODS OF SET-AMKNTKT
"

85

[These gods] have come into being from Ka, and


eye.

" " "

from his substance, and have emerged from his

He

hath decreed for them

[as]

a place

(or,

abode) the

Hidden Mountain (AmetU


gods,

Set),

which consumeth men,


all reptiles

"and
"

and

all

cattle,

and

wliich are

created by this great god.

This great god hath decreed

"

the plans (or, designs) thereof having

made [them]

to

" spring

up

in the earth

which he created."
stand twelve gods,
|
|

On
called

the left of the boat

who
(J

are

"gods

of

Set-Amentet,"
|

r?)

'

^^^

^^>

and the text refcrrhig

to

them reads

ij

1j

=3^^^

s=j

^n
-

Jl

fl2=c5

"

The hidden

place.

[These are]

those
all

who have
the cattle,

"
"
"

consumed the men, and the gods, and


and
all

the reptiles which this great god hath created.

This great god hath decreed plans for them after

"

he made them to spring up in the land wliieh he


that
is

" created, "

to

say,

in the

Amentet

wliich

he

made."

86

CHAPTEE
THE GATE OF
The The Loat
of

III.

SAA-SET.

SEco^'D Division of the Tuat.

Ea,

liaviiig

passed

between

the

two

halves of the horizou of the West,

now approaches a
him
;

gateway, the door of which

is

closed before
is

the

door of the second division of the Tuat

different

from the doors

of the other di\-isions, for it consists of

a single leaf which

turns

upon a pivot working in

holes in the top and bottom of the framework of the


door.

This door

is

guarded by a serpent called


I

SxVA-

Set,

^^

^^j^

which stands upon


:

its tail.

The

text referring to this serpent reads

^
^

imimi

A/ww\

imimi
i

/www .-^^
i

_^^

^
I

"

jt^
Q
r\

t
i"""""

C:^

iii

ii!!

/ww\A

jN

AA/VvV,

iiiiiiiii

'

^ Z

7i
iiiiimi
1

^r^^^

"
I I
I

iiiiimi

AA/WV\

THE GATE OF SAA-SET

87

"He who
"

is

over

(i.e.,

lias

llic

(3m
i2u

"mastery over)
Ri.

this door opeiieth

to

Sa

saith

unto Sat-Set,

'

Open

" "
"

thy thy door to Ra, throw wide door to Khuti. The hidden abode is
tpeii

in darkness, so that the transformathis


is

%l

"tions of

god

may

take place.'

"This portal
"
"

closed after this god


it,

hath entered in through


is

and there

lamentation on the part of those


are
in
their

"who
"

momitain when

they hear this dcjor shut." In the centre of the scene

we

see

the hoat of
four

Ra heing towed along hy


standing,

gods

each

of

whom

grasps the tow-line with Ijoth hands. The god is now in the form of a ram-

headed man, who holds the sceptre


1

in his right

hand, and has the solar


horns.
is

disk

above

his

He
the

stands

within a shrine which


the voluminous

enveloped in
serpent

folds of

Mehen,
his tail

^;

a serpent also stands on

before him.

In frtmt of the
it

shrine stands Sa, and behind

Hekau.

'Si\
-/^

The

''ods

who tow

the boat are called

TUAIU,

^^ICTD^I.


88

SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT


The
Sim's boat
is

met

iu

this section

by a company
of the first

of thirteen gods,

who

are under the direction of a god

who

holds a staff in his hand.

The names
,^

seven gods are: Nepemeh,

NexiiA,

'^,2

Ba,

Q, Heku, ^^,
Setchet,
the
1

r.EHA-AB,

^^"O"? Khnemu, Q, and


tlie

^^

the tliird has


of

head

of a ram, an<I

fourth

that

liawk.

The

last

six

uods

_^,

-'2;V^>'' ""^r_
_,
.

jy

^^

.tss^

^sw^lip <^

The Bout

(if

the

Sun tuwcd by Gods

of the Tuat.

are

described

as

"gods who

;iit'

in

llie

entrances,"

has no uanic.
reads
:

Tlic tcxl

which

vi'tVrs

lo

tlic

Sun-god

N^^^V1l:^k
'

Viir.,

Nki'KN,

'
.

Viii.,

Xkna, /wwv\^

THE GATE OF SAA-SET

89

0^

Seven of the Gods

of the

Kntrances who tow the Soat of the Sun through


Saa-Set.

ff
ir

jlJl.n-JL- '"'118

^^|,iii
P^J

fi

-irS

VI

:^ tT

Six of the Gods of the Kntrances wlio tow the Boat of tlie Saa-Sct, and a god who bears a !taff.

Sun

tliroueh

go

SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT


1

<^^^ .~~^

inn

-<2=^

A^Sf

|i

liiicr:zi^

(5

^ Q <rr cm] ^

1^
I

rj

AAAA/V\

^K\

^
<C5N..

^1-*
(2
I I

l"

^n^'^^vr^ 9 ^^
I

Jn

AA^^A^

n
h

Qp!
I I

-<2>AA/W^
A^^>/VNA

[~i^]

M
e

'^'^'^'^'^

A^\AAA

rt

PI

22
I I
I

A^^\AAA AAA/SAA

Q
I

iCi
I

AAA/W\
I I I

/T\

n
I

'

III

1 A^AA^\ AAAA/SA

wi

1=311

ci

?Q

III
U X
I

ci

LTUTiininr

JJ

III

hl\N\N\

HI

X
I

/ww^

'^
1
I

IV

^'^'^^
I

fl

"Tills uR'ut

"'Oil

iuiiiiicNctii

almiu the

loail.s

ul"

the

SPEECH UF RA TO THE GODS OF SAA-SET


"Tuat.
This god
is

QI

drawn by the gods

of

the

Tuat
the

" in order to

make

divisions (or, distinctions) in

"earth, and to work out [his] designs therein, to weigh


"

words and deeds in Anient, to magnify the great god


above the
little

"

god among the gods who are in the

"Tuat, to place the


" their thrones, "

Knu

(i.e.,

the blessed dead) upon


[in the place] to

and the damned

which

they have been condenuied in the judgment, and to

" destroy their bodies

by an

evil death.

Ra

saith

'

"grant ye to
" I

me

that I

may

restore the tiara,

and
is

tliat

may have

jxtsscssion of

[my] shrine which

in the

" earth. " "

Let Sa and

Heka

unite themselves to

me

for
to

the working out of plans for you, and for

making

come

into being their attributes (or, forms) ye [have]


is

"what
" " door]

yours.

Isis hath

made

to be at i)eace the

wind, and offerings are there.


against you, and the

None shutteth [the damned do not enter in


to

" after you.

That which belongeth

you

is

to you,

"gods.'

These gods say imto Ra, 'There


of

is

darkness
the

"on the road


"

the

Tuat, therefore
let

let

doors

which are closed be unfolded,

the earth open,


that

"so that the gods


"created
"

may draw
food

along him

hath
these

them.'
of

Their

[i.e.,

the food of

gods]

is

the

funeral
cool

oft'erings,

and
their

their

drink
are
of

" is

from

their

waters,

and
the

hands
regions

"on
"

meat
the

olVcriuus

among
ihc

Akert

Anient."

On
the

right

ol'

boat

arc

lwi-iily-l'o\u'

gods,

lirst

twelve

of

wliom

are

described

as

"those


92

SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT


are at peace, the worshippers of Ea,"

who
jlc

^K\

3Q and the second twelve as


,

"

the righteous

who

are in the Tuat,"

^^
S

'

" "

^^
A(^
III
I I

These beings are thus described by the accompanying


text
:

w/wv Jl

ID D
>AAAA

^^
AAAAAA AA/W\A
'

1>\
^ ci
D JT
111

^^WW\
\X\

\7
I

A/'/>/v/V\

ill

Wn.

II

-B^
1

\l

Jl

^/ww\
I I

tk<^
I 1 I

II

cmi

-^^

w
I I
I

^
-ZI
1

AAAAAA

tl^lrriki
mh

AA/VW\ AAAAAA

z^^^M.11

z^^^^ ^ lllllllll

UiW
_
3fcT:^
I I

@
|<:z=>

u u

^'<^

iVIP^lS^I^fPi^SPi:

oa
1

sl H
I

TWENTY-FOUR RIGHTEOUS GODS OF SAA-SET

93

fiiy>?U

..^^(sSII^^-i^M'Sls:
^

(f^i

rr^
JP^

Li_i

)^
-^M

I ^^^^ :^;^

"^^*"

"^

"^r**

/vvwvv;

rr^^' ; '^^oT 1^=^

AV^VA'-A

"

94

SFXOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT


AWAA
i-\

'W^^/V^

AA/WV\ AAAAAA AAA/VSA


I 1 I
I I

iT

111

f
1
I

11

-^

.^.^
AA/^A\
I

^^
A.^W^A

X ^

^
u

to-:
n

-H

rrj

^ w
ci

ft
dl

<=> ^ O

"^"^^
(or,

" Tliese [are

they who] have worshipped

praised)

"

Ea upon earth, who uttered words of power against " Apep, who made their offerings' unto him, and who
"

burnt

(literally,

made) incense

to their gods

on their

"

own

Ijehalf, after their offerings.

They

liave gained

" jDOssession of their cool

waters, and they receive their

"

meat, and they eat of their offerings in the gateway


liini

"of
"

wliose

name

is

hidden.

Their meat

is

by the

gateway, and their offerings are with him

" therein.

And Ra

saith unto

them

Your offermgs
'

who

is

" are yours,

ye have power over your cool waters, your

"souls shall never be hacked to pieces, your meat


"shall never
"
fail,

[0 ye who have] praised [me], and

have vanquished Apep for me.'

The

a])ove passage refers to the " worshippers of

Ra

who
"

are at peace,"
trutli

[These are] they [who] spake

u]ion

earth,


SPEECHES OF RA AND THE HODS
"and
" tliey

95
about
tlie

ulio \\v\v

iiol

.ulilicLtMl

lo e\il tliuughl

" gods.

They mako
live

their invocations in this gateway,


(i.e.,

iqxtn

maat

trutli),

and

their

cool
:

"

waters are in their cisterns.


is

Efi saith

unto tliem

"'Truth
" "

yours, live ye
; '

<n

your food.

Ye

yourselves
their cool

are trutli

and they have power over these


fire

waters, whicli are waters of

to

tliose wlio

have

'

.... ' .....

...

-^:

r-:

. ,,

***.* VI'.*'

*..*

*.*.'.'!',.''

\.

','

'..','''

'

'

^^

'

'

" ^-*^

J^~w^

0^

-[J

^;__.

MWVWW l/WW\

*-\l

I
" guilt
" there
" in

Seven

of the rifjliteous

gods of the Tuat.

and

sin.

And

these

gods say to
of Ea.

Ea
and

Let
'

he stability to

tlie

Disk

Let him
it,

tiiat is

the shrine have the mastery over

let

the

"

serpent [Mehen] guard

him

well.

May

the flames of

"Khnti which are

in the corners of the

hidden shrine

"grow
"

stronger,'

And

there shall be given to

them

meat

in the place of peace in their circle."


g6

SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT


The above passage
refers to the " I'ighteous

who

are

ill

the Tiiat."

On
^

the h'f i side


wlio
is

if

the

"oat uf Jla are


tlie

1.

The god Tem,

depicted in

form
lie

of

an aged man,

Njll

IL

leaning heavily on a stick which

grasps in his right

hand.

2.

Four male beings who are lying prostrate on


?>.

their backs.
l)0wed,

Twenty male

beings, with their Imcks


their ell)Ows

and their arms

tied together at

The fonr beings are debeliind their backs.

^-^

S^
I

"X-"^-

^ ^^

scriljed

as

"the

inert,"

jv

'T^

i^Zm

Zm^ZjJf^

tJie

twenty as

"

the apos-

" tates of "

the Hall of Ea,

" Rii n])on earth,


"
'

who have ])lasphemed who have


the Egg,
aside

invoked evils npon liim


tliat is in

who
the

;.

:,

;:.'v.\'- ::.":.

I-.;-

" ]iave
.

tlirust

The

inert Apostates

and Blasphemers ofRa.

"right,

and have spoken


y^

"words against KhT'TI," ~<^'^v

The text referring


reads
:

to

tlie

inert

and

tlio

apostates

THE GATE OF SAA-SET

97

oTii
[

rv/

^2i

yWVAAA

(2

/wwv^C:^5lll

^
I
I

Jr

III

i<CZ>
tJ

_^S

/wwv\ ..JU,.-^^
iiinini

^wvaa'^^
_fl
I

^^

/WWNA
I
I I

Ji f.

s=>
{WVWV

[^^ fV

3 = ^ ^^ s=
^
5^
.

^ .^ cz^ "-^"^ <=> r\ rm


I I I

ill'-'

l==_

S^

* c=^'A'^ <=>
I
i

^
W

c=>=3
I I

s=>
I I

<=:>
A/WWS

"^3:^ n fk.
/WWVV
1

^^^^^
I

11!^

Jl
I

!wiw!

II

Jl 11
^*^

LU iiiiliiiiii:^^Ji
I ,
,

A/^v/vV\

AAAAAA

V\ ^^^

^^
..,

A^^WV.
I
I I

<=^

4 =<^^

SiJ

21
^-=-

<=

Ml TT

I ^

III

is=.

Jf

^o
[TZD

<^
^
/i

^^^
X
l'

zi

-t^
^

II

"==^

S< ^=
I
I

^^^^^
^Jn=n:

"

Tern worketh on behalf of Ra, glorifying the god,


VOL.
IT.

g8
"

SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT


to
liis

and singing praises

soul,

and
:

dislriliuting evil

"tilings to his enemies.

[He

saith]

'Tiie

word

of

"my
"

father lia
is

is

right (madt) against yon, and


I

my

word

right against yon.

"ceedeth from his father, and


"proceedeth from his son.
" are tied

am the son who }>roam the father who


are fettered, and ye
it

Ye

with strong cord, and

is I

who have

sent

"forth the decree concerning vou that ve should he

^^

,v

-,

w-vw

'

=>

"-

."^r^

v(

'

\_L

Tlie Apostates

and

liliispliemers of Ra,

who

arc (loomed to destruction, with

their

arms bound.

"hound
"opened.

in

fetters;

youi'

arms
the

shall

ne\er more he

Ha
is

])ron()nn('eth

formula against yon,


;

" his soul

prepared to attack you

my

father hath

"gained the mastery over you, and his soul uttereth


"

words against you.

Your

evil deeds

[ha\'e turned]

"against yon, your ])lottings [have come] u])on


"

you,

your ahominahle acts [have recoiled]


are
for
evil,

\\\)on

you, your

"destinies

and

your

dcjoni

hath

heen

RA

DECREE OE DOOM

99

"decreed before Ea; your unjust and perverted judg"


"

ments are upon yourselves, and the wickedness


your words
of cursing are
l)een

of

upon you.

E\'il is

the

doom

" wliicli " It


is

hath

decreed for you before


sins,

my

father.

you who have committed


iniipiity in the

and who have

"wrought

Great Hall; your corruptible

Sn ''
_!_:

*
^

'^

III

<WW^

V^^l

M *WW "V
>

=*
.

tvvrt

IjT^

^-

^ ^ r^

t:;

2^ Sr^

^3f Pll

The Apostates and

Bliispheiners of RS, who arc their arms bound.

doomed

to destruction,

with

" l)odies shall


" "

be cut in pieces, and your souls shall

have no existence, and ye shall ne\'er again see Ra


with his attril)utes
Hail, Ha!
[as]

he journeyeth in the hidden


Tiiino enemies are

"land.

Adored be Ra!

"in

tlie ])lace of

destruction.'"

100

CHArTEE

lY.

THE GATE OF AQEBI.


The
Tiiiijd

Division of the Tuat.

The

l3oat of

the sun having passed tln-ough the Second the Tuat arrives at
the gateway ^^hic'h
is

Division of
leads to the

Third Division.

This gateway

unlike
for
its

the

first,

which has already been described,


is

opening

protected

l)y

an outwork, similar to
of a fortified Iniilding.

tliat

which protects the door

The
of

outwork

is

guarded by nine gods, in the form


as the " second
in this wall,

mummies, who are described


gods," of the o '

company

^ ^

111 111

jk

^'

iiiid

which com-

pletely divides
is

the Second Di\isi(>n from the Third,


that

an

opening, whicli leads to a ccmidor

runs

between

tw(i walls, tlio tojis of whicli are protected

by

rows of poiiilod stakes, AAA AAA.


the corridor

At

the entrance to form, called


is

stands a god, in

nmmmied

Am-aua,

^;^ "^^

and at the exit

a similar

n A /wwv\
I

god called Sekhahesnefunen,


each
D

^ Y>

/wwvA
;

is

said to "extend his


I
I

arms and hands

to Ka,"

AAAAftA,

QO

At each

side of the angle, near

il

^i2.tii:f34>iay3&i^>^4i

The Gate

of the Serpent Aiiebi.


102

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


is

the t'liiraucc to the corridor,

a serpent,

who

ejects

Haines from
al(ii,i!,-

mouth; the tiame from the one sweeps the corrido]-, at the end of which it is met by
liis

the llaiue from the other ser})ent which sw"ee})S along

the

inside

of

the
said

inner
to
l)e

walL
for

Tlie

tiames of these

serpents are

Ea,
is

ww\a
^

"Yha

gateway leading

to the
i

Third Division
'^^^*^^

called Septet^^*^'*^*^"

UAUAU,

<

=-3
who

iOtyIII,''
is

^'^^^

thereof,

whicli opens inwards,

guarded by the serpent standing


'^

on his

tail,

is

called Aqebi, '^i^

J HH

'^^'

^^^^^

faces outwards.
Ila

The

texts referring to the entrance of

through this gateway read:

-/i

A/VWV\

<^

-Si)

"^

AAA/V\A

iJ

'^ AAAWV\

lllllllll

LJ

AAA/Vv\

<^
^^

"-^^"

AA/V\/\A

-^ A/W\AA
I

"mmnr

A/WSAA

-^

sQ
11

X
AA/W\A
iiiniiii

F^Y^

r]

AA/VW\
/

n
I

<ci

>^

1
I

AAAAAA AAAA
lllllllll

71

ra

mm
-rl

ra's
"

address to the serpent aqebi


this

103

[When]

god cometh

to this gateway, to enter

" in
"

through

this^

gateway, the gods


'

who

are therein

acclaim this great god, [saying],

Let this gateway be


doors be opened to

"
"

unfokled

t(.)

Khuti, and

let the

" "
"

thou traveller, him that is in heaven. Come then, who is over this who dost journey in Amentet.' He door openeth [it] to Ra. Sa saith unto Aqebi, Open
'

thy gate to

lia,

unfold thy door to KiiUTi.

He

shall

"illumine the darkness, and he shall force a


" "

way

for

the light in the habitation which

is

hidden.'

This

door

is

closed
it,

after
is

the great god hath entered

"

through
tlieir

and there

lamentation to those
this

who

are

" in "

gateway when they hear


of the Tiiiinj

door close

[upon them]."

Along the middle


lioat

Division we see the


l)y

of the
;

sun being drawn along

four gods, as

Ijefore

the ^^od

Ka

stands in a

slirine,

similar to that

already

descril)ed,

and

his

companions are Sa and


is

IIekau.

The
form

roi)e ly

which the boat

towed along

is

fastened to
in

tlie

two ends
of
1

of a ^ery remarka])le oljject,

the

long leam, each end of

which

terminates in a
describes
that the
it

mil's head.

The
'^'^=^

acconi})aiiying text
'^^^^^

as "his boat,"

^^

from the

fact

Umr gods who tow


it is

the boat are seen again at

ibf olhrr cud of the bcaui-liki' object, with the towing-

rope in their hands,

clear tliat the boat of 11a,


it,

and

the god himself, were V)elieved to pass through

from

one end

to tlie other.

The

object

is

supported on the

104

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


"

shoulders of eight gods, in numiiuied form,


called " Bearers of the gods,"

who

are
I

^^.^^"^

(](]

"^ ^

at each end, innnediately behind the liuU's head, stands

Inill,

and

at intervals seven gods, wlio are called " the

Lmt T VK ^

i^

y ?^

-1 .^

>'

S^

fr>

The Gods

of the Third Division of the

Tuat

towiiiir tlic Boat, of Ka,

'

t?

f^

l-TJ "T-.

.15

^
Tlic I'^H^ht lijarei'B
cif

the Boat of

tlic

Earth and

its

Seven

Ciods.

gods who arc within,"


Tijioii
it.

^
of

V\
n
a.

V\

i,

are seated

At

the

end
witli

this

Division

stand

I'onr

ininnmicfl
their

I'oiins,

their

ellMiws

]ir()jeeting,
'Tlic

and
Icxt

hands

crossed

on

theii

hrcasls.


KA PASSES THROUGH THE KARTH-GOD
which refers to the passage
reads
:

IO5

of

the boat of the sun

1
i=3^
I I

A/^W\A

/I\

'1

I -

Ml

A. www

^
cli "^-^^^'
1 I

xn
/v\/vsA^

^\
\C\
I

inJilllllllllD

^kiiihT1Ji IV^^kS^li-M'JJ^T^

io6
i*""^
AA^AAA
(E AAAAAA

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


O
'^

^
,

dJ
AV/W\
I I
I

5i_

ra
,

"

A/VWVN

.
[111]

(5

[111]

AAAA/V\
[111]

AAAAAA

^^i^^

A/V>AVv

/^

/-^ /WWVA
AAAAAA

111

Q^} Pf^ ^
111

^
<::i

A/WSAA,

AAAA^\ A/WVV\

^^(^3)

D 5

^TP:

"
'

This great god

is

towed along

)y

the gods of the


tlie

Tuat, and this great god ad\'ancetli to the Boat of


Earth, which

'

'

them

Hail,
'

is

the bark of the gods.

Ha
of

saith unto

ye gods who

hear up his

Boat

of

'

the Earth, and

who

lift

np the Bark
to
is

the Tuat,

'may
'of
'

there

l)c

support

your
lie
\\

forms
is

and
the

liglit

'unto your
the

IJark.
1

Holy

ho

in

])oat
of

Earth.

make
into

to

go

))aek

the

]>ark

the

Tuat which
I

lieareth

my
the

forms

(or,

attributes),
to

'and verily

travel

hidden

haliitation

'perform the plans which are carried ont therein.'


'ExKUiiKiiATA,

Ennuhkhata
J)oul)le
lie

[saitli],
liatli

'Praised be the

'Soul which
'let
'

the

Bull
willi

swallowed, and
wliich
lie

ihc god
"

at peace

that

hath

created.'

The
^od

eriecl

of

llie

abo\"e
to

Words

is

lo

allow

the Suubull-

and

his

boat

pass through the double


RA PASSES THROUGH THE EARTH-GOD
headed 15oal
(f

I07

the Earth

\vithi\it

any

let or liinch-anee,

and wiien he has done

tliis,

"These
"the
"

gnd.s

(i.e.,

the four gods at the other end of

JJuat of tlie

Earth) say to

Ea

'Praised
tlie

lie

Ha,
!

whose Soul hath been absorbed by


be the gods of

Earth-god

" 1 'raised

Ea

wlio hath rested [tlierein].'

"This
"

J)oat of its

Tuat

rejoiceth,

and there are


lie

cries

from them after Ea hath passed them as


his way.

journeyeth

"on

Their

ott'eiings are

the i)lants of the year,

T r^ ^
,r=
1

i:::
v>wM

^>1

ww i_L^-

^ ^t^^\ A
t-j.

'^^

I"**

r-

'b -"^

^^ \^
I

\/

<

;^ :zrD ^ 1^ IV -^ 'f^ '-^^ ^^^^ 11^ -a '^. "III *VW "I i /I *;;i^ ^ fa.
i
i;^'-
I

m^^ /^
'-'^w'^

^_ -^
N.\W

^-^w.^.^ '^--w-i.^

AM, Iujm am, |UM 1 ^

"^.^^

v^* f^
.vAMM

T
I I
I

.r[^ .Ti

>"*^
>

"

...Til

>!

7^^

TP

tttt
The

^fr#f
address the Utnii.

Tuat-j?otl.s

"and
"

their otl'erings arc gi\en lo

them when

tliey liear

the words of those


of the

"The gods
"
"

who draw along this Tuat(0 ^^''" [draw] the


of the earth,

great god.
lioly

Eoat

"in the earth say unto the Utau, whose arms are
hidden
stand(
:

O ye Utau
'

whose duty

it is

to

near his habitation, w hose heads are uneovered,

"and
"

wlutse
<)

arms are hidden, may


IItaT',

liiere

be air

t<j

your

"nostrils,

and may your funeral swathings

be burst o[)en, and

may

n'ou

iia\e

tlie

mastery over

io8

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


"

your meats, and

may
(or,

ll3a;ii:

"yoii have peace


" rest) in
"

that which I

ha^'e created.

Their

V t
I*

"food

is

of

bread

"cakes, and their " liread made of is


"

the

red

grain,

the

" "

draughts whicli they


drink
are
of
[cool]

in

"

water, and their

meat

" is
" "

given unto them

because of the whiteness


((r,

brilliance)

" of "

their

apparel

in

the Tuat."

I"

On
side
of the

tlie

right

hand

of

this

Division

Tuat the boat

3if ir!>ii<!

of

the

Sun
shrines,
its

passes

twelve
(if

each
doors

which has

thrown wide open, and


so permits us to sec a

god in

mummied form
inside
it

standing
llu'sc

gods
as

are
" tlie

de-

scribed

holy

"^
ll<4

L;(jds

who

are in the

11-11:

The-Twclvc

holj' Goils

who

are lu the Tual,


THE GODS OF THE BOILING LAKE
log

I* T-.-in^i^qfl^ii^i^cm]
I

the frout of the twelve shrines stretches an enormous


serpent, the

duty

of

which

is

to

protect those
is

who
in

stand in them.
or

Beyond the shrines


water,
their

a long basin
ends,

lake

of

Iwiling

with
waists

rounded
twelve

wliieli

stand

up

to

mummied
god

gods, witli black heads,

who

either have white bodies,


;

or are arrayed in wliite apparel

in front of each

grows a large ear


as

of wheat.

These gods are described


lake,"
]
|

"the

gods
1

in

the

l)oiling

|nr

'

Jl

TJie texts
:

which relate

to both groups

of beings are as follows

u
I I

AAAA/V\
lllllllll
I I I \ \ \

J^

Kl
*.

Oil
A/VWAA
I I I

l^=

Jta

-^

I^Sfffi^l
I I I
I

ii^ /wvAAA
/vvvvv\
I

A^AA/^^ /vvvvv\
I I I

T ?
ra

\my
/NA/>AAA

/-/V/>AA

in
AA/Vv\A

i^ ^
(2

('^^^iS^^

rT~i

^
^

t.

G
=0=111

no

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


A/AA/V\
111

^'^^^"^
I I I

/VWAAA
/W^A/V^ A^(Vv^A
H

rvW\JV\

8
,1

lllllllll

AAIWVS

'0' /WVVVv

Df

iiiiinrr

1
I I
I

^
I
I I

[III]

(2^^

1^1
oa
I

,^Tifrfif 11T
V

D
AAAAAA

n
1

^[
D

^^ ^

^f

AfW\/V\

^VNAAA

^_
/VVS/\AA

^ iy ^
<:3 ili

i^

AAAAAA

11

o m <=
I

1
.
.

^f
^^(^
'

^
UN

AA/wv\
LIIIJ

I,

n ^^ AAAAAA
[III]

CZEZl
'

'^^S*

A/V^AA^ III

^-^^

AA/WVA

C^

II

II

RA ADDRESSES THE SHENNU GODS

III
v\

W ^
/WyWN
"
*^

III
111

^ ^

\U y
III

AA/w^^

(a

'^=

,^^^ M
A-.^^v

Jl

&

C___Z) ^

AWWv_|

[Those Avho are iu] their shrines are the

meml ers
of]

" of tlie o-od "

whose shrines the serpent Seti guardeth.


them:

Ea

saith unto
so

'Open
!

ye [the doors

your
the

" shrines,

that

my

radiance
I

may

penetrate

"

darkness in which ye are

found you weeping and

"lamenting, with your shrines tightly closed, hut air


" shall "

he given to your nostrils, and I have decreed

that ye shall have abundance to overflowing [in

"tilings].'
"

And

these gods say unto

Ilfi

'Hail,

all

Ra,

come thou

into our lake,

thou great god who ne\'er

"failest.'

The Shennu gods who are before and behind

"him
"

i)ay

homage

to

him, and they rejoice in

Ea when
great god

he traverseth

[their] region,

and when
place.

tlie

"journeyeth through the secret

Their food
is

"consisteth of loa^es of l^read, their drink

"from
"

the red [1)arley], and


[their cisterns of] water,

their

cool waters

made come
live

from

and the serpent

of fire,

" Seti,
" there.

giveth unto

them the things whereon they


in

The door which shutteth them

closeth

" after this


" "

god hath passed through their midst, and

they utter cries of grief when they hear their doors


shut upon them."

The text iu brackets is supplied from Lefebure, Les Hypogees Rnyaux de Thebc>< (Tombeau de Seti l^', iv^ partie, pi. xiv.), Paris,
'

1886.


112

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


The following
re-

fers to the lake of

f
"1

water
Division
"
:

in

this

[Here

is]

the

"lake of water
"which
"Tuat,
is

in
it

the
is

and

"surronnded by
"

the gods

who

are

"arrayed in
" " "

[their]

"apparel, and

who
This

have

[their]

heads

uncovered.
lake
is filled

with

nil'-'"

" "

oreen herbs.

The

C'^M'I^
Of (

water

of this lake

" is
'

boilmg hot, and

l"!*

ill if.

"the birds betake

"themselves to "flight when they


C>i
" see

the

waters

" thereof,

and when
the

"

they

smell

I
^

" foetid

smell which
it.

o KX
HM:!IUI<k

"is
"

in

Unto
saith

these

gods

"Ra: '0

ye gods
it
is

"whose duty

i.iii<;oiiir:d-^iii*i:
The Gods
of the Boiling Lake.

THE GODS OF THE BOILING LAKE


"[to guard] the green
lierl>s of

II3

your lake, whose heads

"are unc<n'ered, and whose limbs are covered with "garments,

may
l)e

there
to

l)e

air to

your

nostrils,
herl)s,

and may
and may

" otferings l)e

made

you

of the

green

"your meat
"
" "

from your

lake.
it

The water thereof


and

"shall be yours, but to you


the

shall not be boiling,

heat

thereof

shall

not be upon your bodies.'


Kfi
:

These [gods] say unto

Come
'

thou unto
is of

us,

thou who sailest in thy

Ijoat,

whose eye

blazing

" fire

which consuineth, and hath a pupil which sendeth


!

" forth light " "


"

The beings of the Tuat shout with joy when thou approachest send forth thy light upon us, thou great god who hast fire in thine eye.' Their
;

food consisteth of loaves of bread and green herbs, and

" their
" cool

drink

(or,

beer)

is

of the Icemtet plants,

and

their

water

is

from

[their cisterns of] water.

And

food

" shall

be given unto them in abundance from this lake."


the left of the path along which the boat of

On

Ea
of

passes in this Division of the


beings.
,

Tuat are two groups

In the

first

of

these

we

see the

god Tem,

in the

form

of
;

an

aiied

man, with bent shoulders,


in

leaning upon a staff


folds,

coiled

up before him

voluminous

with

its

head

fiat

upon the ground, is the monster


l>ehind

serpent Apep,

Apep stand nine men,


their
sides
;

with

their

arms hanging by

these
i i

are

called tlie

"Tchatciia who repulse Apepi,"

^
is

In the second group

Te.m,

D D
VOL.
II.


114

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


in a similar atti-

tude,

and before

him stand nine


gods, each hold-

ing
of

the
life

symbol
in

the

right hand, and

the sceptre

in

w<

the left; the nine

gods
"

are

called

Nebu
"

khert,"

Ii.e.,

Lords
-^

of
i

destinies,"

The
^vllich

texts
refer
to

these groups
read
III
:

l-^i.c^u 1^=1

J\
a^
(2

^^
u

J\

Thc Tchalcha who

reiJulse

Apcp.

THE TCHATCHA WHO REPULSE APEP

II5

^^
^^>-

D D
AAAA^

11^ ^
I I I

i;

^3P5 D D
(T)

^^

^=3

>^kT?l
i\
AAAA'vA

U.

>-Q*C

6)

JU.

^^-eSHii-_c^_U^,.
o

,|inu^

s^Srni^oMI^Srrit
I I
I

"I

/www

=1

S\

fii^i^fli^^r^

0^^^=^

ii6

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


ra
(5

r^o
r

nifv
>

A
s

AA^AAA
AAAAAA

A/V\AAA

D
^--^

1 ^ w^
m-PY - jrSflt
/O
H

^
rsNsN^
I

Ul

AA/WVv

lO
'^

I1^J
J\
\
\

J\

J\

\\

^r?i
The
"
" "
first

<^
"

group shows us what

Tem hath done

for

Ea, aucl how he hath protected the god by words of


magical
Seba.

power, and

hath
]
'

overthrown the serpent


art prostrate,

[Temu

saith

Thou
;

and thou

" shalt "


" " "

never more

rise

up

thou art enchanted by [my

enchantments], and thou shalt never more be found.

The word
word
"
is

of

my

father

is

madt against
;

thee,

and

my
for

madt against thee


of the
is slit,

have destroyed thee


of thee for

Ea, and I have made an end

Khuti.'
repulse

The company
: '

" say
"

Thy head
A

gods of

Ea who

Apep

Apep, thy folds are gashed,

thuu shalt never more envelop the boat of Ea, and

"

thou shalt never again make a way into the divine


flame of
fire

"bark.
"

goeth out against thee from


thee to thy

the hidden place, and

we have condenmed

THE LORDS O F DESTINIES


" dire doom.'
'

(.'')

117

Thuy
Ea)
of

(i.e.,

the nine gods of the


of
live

"company
"

upon the food


upon
the

Ea,

"and

cakes

"of Khent-Amenti, for


are made on "their behalf upon
" offerings

V
?r-.ll. /^

" earth,
" cool

and lilmtions

of

water are

made

"unto them hy the lord


" of food (or, as lords of
"

food) before Ea."

To the second group


of

nine
: '

saith
"

Inasmuch
authority),

gods

"

Tem
as

ye are the gods who

" possess life


"
"
(i.e.,

and sceptre
and

who have mastery over


your sceptres, drive ye
back the serpent Seba
in

" " "

from Khuti, gash ye


knives
the foul
Af.'

" witli

"and
" "

evil serpent

These are the gods who

work enchantments on
open
the
earth to Ea, and

"Apep, who
"

who

The Lords

of Destiiiie.s(?).

ir8
" (sliut it "

THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT


against

They

are those

Apep iu the gates of Khenti-Amenti. who are in the hidden place, and they

"praise Ea, and they destroy his enemies, and they

"protect the great one against the serpent Afu, and


"

they utter cries of

jo}"

at the overthrow

by Ea

of the

enemy of Ea. They live upon the meat of Ea, and "on the cakes offered to Khenti-Amenti. Offerings " are made on their behalf upon earth, and they receive
" " libations
"

through

[their]

word being madt

in Anient,

and holy are they

of

arm

in

their

hidden place.

"They -utter
"

cries to Ea,

and they make lamentation

" for the great

god after he hath passed by them, for


departed they are enveloped in darkcircle is closed

when he

liath

" ness,

and their

upon them."

Tin

CHAPTER

V.

THE GATE OF TCHETBI.


The Fourth Division of the Tuat. The
boat of the sun having passed through the Third
^^hicll

Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway


leads to the Fourtli Division.

This gateway

is

like

that which admitted the god into the Third Division,

and
of

its

outwork

is

guarded

l)y

nine gods, in the form

mummies, who
f) f=vi
tlie

are described as the " third com-

pany
III

of the gods of the great

god who are within,"

entrance to
walls
is

corridor which runs l)etween the two

a god in munniiied form called En'UE]!KIIATA,

'^

^n^

"

and at the exit

is

a similar

god

called

Seta-ta,

v\ '^L.

eacli

god has a
extend his
^^^^

uraeus over his brow, and

eacli is said to "

arms and liands


corridor
is

to

Ha,"

^^ ^^ 9*

swept by flames
of

of hre

which proceed from

the mouths
angle,

and their

two serpents, stationed each at an " fire is for Ra." The gateway of the
is

Fourth Division

called XEi-.T-s-TcHErAF,
.

'^^
(S)
V

i,
I


120

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


says,
"

and the text

This great god

cometh
it,

to

this

''gateway, and entereth in tlu'ongh


"

and the gods


IJ

who
0'

are therein

acclaim

him,"

<=>

>/

inI

^
'
AAAAAA
r

v^
^

'

'^

,,,

nr

'

/vww\

fvi

'^'^^
I
I

n wl
I

"^^^^

company

of

gods say to

Ea,
" "

"

Open thon the

earth, force thon a


is

way throngh

the Tnat and the region which

above, and dispel


ns,'
H

onr darkness

hail,

Ea, come thou to


"t*
I

^
1

2i

;^^

fv

(7\

NsN^N\

m ^ i1
[][]
'

"^
I

-^v^/^

Aw^.
^^=^

II

_B^

III

The

monster

serpent
is

which stands on
called TcHETBi,

his tail

and guards the gateway


^^^'^
^^^*^

^^ \^i

^^^^^

^"^^'^ ^

^"^^^
is
:

which refer
"

to his admission of

Ea
Sa

read, "

He who

over this door openeth to Ea.


'

saith to

Tchetbi

"
"

Open

[thy] gate to Ea, unfold thy doors to

Khuti,

that he

may
is

send light into the thick darkness, and

"

may make
through
this

his radiance illumine tlie hidden habitation.'

"This door
"
it,

shut after this great god hath passed


is

and there

lamentation to those

who

are

" in

gateway when they hear

this door close

upon

rrrSr

Ki^ ^^zz^

A.r~^

wm

/^^ww -^

\\

iU

^^^^=^

<
I

rf:n=H5i'iw^^^e=^i
.

...

^^^^rr*

The Gate

of the Serpent Tchetbi.

^
122

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

^
D

n
UZZ3

z]

Ji

^
lieing

ra
j\

D
tlie

mm
its

^/wws

In the middle of this Division we see

boat of

Ea
the

towed on
in the

way by

four gods of the


as before,

Tuat

god

is

same form

and stands

in a

shrine enveloped by

Me hen.

Sa stands

in the liows,

and Heka at the

stern.

Tlie boat advances to a long,

low building with a heavy cornice, which contains nine


small shrines or chapels
;

in each of these

is

a god in

mummied form

lying on his back.

Tlie nine gods are

described as the "gods


their abodes " (literally,

who
"

follow Osiris,
"),

who

are in
I

holes

111

^::.^

[y\^\
who stand upon

o
III
I

AAW\A
I

Immediately

in front of the

nine shrines are two groups, each containing six women,


a slope, one half of which appears to

be land and the other half water; these


called " the hour goddesses

women

are

which are in the Tuat,"


is

^
the otlier
l)y

1__^.

Eacli grou})

separated from
folds called

a monster serpent of

many
is

Hereket,
"s])awneth
hours.

^^,

and

of

liim
to

it

said

that
l)y

he
tlie

twelve serpents

l)e

devoured

THE GODDESSES OF THE HOURS

12^,

^S.U?i;

The Gods

of the

Fourth Division

of the

Tuat towing- the Boat of Ra.

The Nine Gods who follow

Osiris.

(fifi-

.-jL-^ii

The Serpent Hereret and the Goddesses of

tlie

Hours.


124

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


text relating to the passage of the boat of the sun
:

The

reads

\\

-S^Alll
/WVSAA

^
I

o__>
I
I I

^ ^^^^
_B^

s^

Jl c=i^-

Ja^

Jf

^1

\^\

A^^v^A^
I I

N-^

l\.
III

^^,^^,^
I I

tJ
D

i:^

-<S>-

^
Ji
III

A^^y\^ AAAAAA

/WWV%

-A

,1

M
III

J\

CZSZJ
J\

If

^
^ o

zmmmmAMm
U
I

1
I I

[r:=i

jr'

r\

AAAAAA

53>.

^
A/VWSA

f
Aft/WNA

AWVNA <=Z:>3

111^

i^mrnTlla:]1


DESCRIPTIVE TEXT

'

125

\l
/WvWS

ci

Ci

^^^
'WVW\

g)

-A"

^=^

A'WVVN

^^rn^i
/I

*?.

Ill

(0

=0=111

III
^

=^1

|U ^,,,
j

,^AWv\^ /v\flAA^
I

ra
I
I

lAi

i;^^^
lllllllll
I

(s

Ji
AAAAAA

^
I
I

r^
I

M
I

II

II

y^
AAAAAA

<=:>

01

111^
I

nflVR
jj

o
AA/^A^^

AAWvW

AWVN
I I I

AAAAAA
I I I I

/V\r^^V^

Millie
o
v^
[III]

^J)
I

\\

LL

A/WWv

i^mf
AAA/vW

AAAAAA

AV.AAA

^2i

==:^
V>

III

LI7J

1^.

A^
II

IT

fVWW\
[111]

o
(5
I

'^'^'^^^

Ci
AA^WVA

<:i

'" ^.
-^i
III

[III]

AWW\
A^^NAAA

^
(7

I)

(S

C^^ III
A^yVAAA

AAAAAA
I
I

^ ^
17
III

Oiii

<=>

A/VVVAA
1 I
I

AAAAAA
A^NAAA AAAAAA

AAAAAA

PVi^^lmk
"

LTZD

AVVV\\

^ w
in

jji'iir

This great god

is

drawn along by the gods


of

of the

"Tiiat,
"

and he journeyeth

the liidden place, and

worketh in respect

the things which are there.

"

126
" "
" "

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


saith
:

[He

'

Draw ye me

along,
I

ye beings of the

Tuat, look ye upon me,

[for]

have created you.


ye

TuU ye with your arms and draw


and turn ye aside

me
(or,

therewith,

to the eastern part of heaven, to

"

the habitations which surround Ares


that hidden mountain, the light

Sar) [and

" to] " "

(or,

radiance) of

which goeth round about among the gods who receive

me as " Draw
" "

come forth among you into the hidden ye me along, [for] I work on your behalf
I

place.

in the

gateway which covereth over the gods

And Ea

saith unto

" gods, for I strike


" [saying]. "
'

them those who


!

Look ye upon
'

of the Tuat.'

me,

are in their sepulchres,

Arise,

ye gods

have ordered for you the

plan and manner of your existence,

your sepulchres, whose souls

"

upon your own up before


right state by

filth

and feed

who are in are broken, who live upon your own offal,
ye

" rise "

my

Disk, and put ye yourselves in a


of

means

my

l)eams.

The

duties

which

"ye
" "

shall ha^e in the


1

Tuat are

in conformity

with the

things which

have decreed for you.'


is

Their food

consisteth of flesh, and their ale

[made] of the red

" [barley], " is


"

and their

libations are of cool water.

There

lamentation to them after they have heard their

doors close upon them."

said
:

In respect
"

of the

twelve goddesses of the hours

it is

[These are]
is

they who stand upon

their lake,

"

and

it

they

who guide

lia in a straight line

by
:

" "

means
'

of

their instruments.
(J

To them Ra

saith

Hearken,

ye goddesses

of the

hours of the night


KA
"sky.
S

ADDRESS TO THE HOURS


and eat
ye,

I27
ye in your

Work

ye,

and

rest

"gateways, with your breasts towards the darkness,

"and your hind-parts towards the


" "

light.

Make

to

stand up the serpent Hereret, and live ye upon that

which conieth forth from

it.

It is

your duty in the


shall

"
" "

Tuat

to eat

up the spawn

of

Hekeuet, and ye
it.

destroy that which cometh forth from

me, for

have begotten you in order that ye

Draw ye may pay


cakes
of

"
" "

homage
(

[to me].
!

Take ye your

rest (or, be at peace),

ye Hours

'

Their food consisteth of


is

bread,

and

their ale

[made] of the red [barley], and


is

" their

-draughts are of cool water, and there

given

"

unto them as their food that which cometh forth with


kltit (i.e.,

"the

the l)eatitied dead)."

On
Sun

the right hand of the path of the boat of the

in the

Fourth Division we see

1.

Twelve gods,

1)earded

and standing upright, who are called "the


carry along their doubles,"
| | |

gods
. ,

who

"Jy

-'-^

.2.
"

Twelve iackal-headed gods, who stand


of

round the

Lake

Life,"

c/

T
'

""^^^^
'

^^^

called the "jackals in the lake of


-^k

life,"

"y ')^

v^
"

-r

3.

Ten

uraei,

which stand round


,

the
"

Lake

of the Uraei,"

JL
'^

and are called the

Livhig Uraei," h

;^ ^ ^

"f"

'l

^^^^ ^^^^^

which refer

to these tliree

groups of beings read:


128

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

Jr

III

Li

III!

f^ TTl
Jl II
I

:::!^
-

^^

(3

i>

<=>
I

aj\

M-t^

CZ^

' -^

/www
ft
I

/^vwv\

1
*^3'
I

o o
1 I
1 1

o s ^^^^^^^ /VW\AA

A^A^A^

'

\"\"\

AV^A^^

II

^ ^^
III

A/WV\A
I
I I

i-j
I
I

^^

.^o
I

A^^vAAA
I

A^AAA^

[rzD
ra

o e

^ w

'

ra
jfj^
^tt^^

ra
/Tti
'^'^^''^
I

AAIWVA
I

II

tl

AAAAAA

ra
<^ JL
I

t
I
I

A/VWW

^
I I

AA/w^^
I

7^
I
I

Ml"-'

AA/WAA

AAAAAA
I

11

fl^

^ -eD
AA/wyv^

V [^]

mo
\=^
311]

5=5

^
I
I

II

<=> ITI

iTl
I

Tl

AAAA/Vv
I
I

AAAAAA

II


DESCRIPTIVE TEXTS


12g
I ^^

Q-^ r^xn s=3


^ D
1
1

"2^

Ik ^
I

'^
I
I

^-Q-^ C3XZ1
III
I

s=>

11

-^-

_^ J^
'^z:^

^^^

B SIM
\> 'vz:^
I

II

ml

/= '^z^ <=>U

III

^:=^(

^ w ^
I

D
AA,Vj\^
1
1 1

m^
=0=
iQ>
-^^

^= ^
*

III

III

.wwvN

e ^/

^=>

^ ^ 'fL 111^ _^ III"-' .m


""""
I

J\
I
I

II
AAAAAA

n tk iH jrt;::^!

^^

/ j^ (^^ ^* /<-% 1^^371'rri


/
I
I

I'^i

^^|tKrn^o^^
I I

II

\> AAA^WS

/WWV\

_Zr

J^

J\

-I
I
I

C=i=^

r\N\N\r\

Ly lu

C^ AA^^\

't^J
I

Ml

^
2^..=^

^'t^

III

'* ^ W

/w>A/v%

Q::l
(2

^^
I

Tlie

paragraph which refers to the

first

twelve gods

reads
"

[These are]

they

who

bear along their doubles,

"who immerse
"

themselves in that which floweth in

abundance from the slaughtered ones during the time

" of their existence,


"

and who carry the

offerings

which

are rightly due [to the god] to his abode.


VOL.
II.

Unto them


130
" saith

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

Ra

That which
'

belongeth to you [to do],


offermgs,
is

" ye gods

who

are

among your

to offer as

"an obligatory offering your doubles. Ye have your " own offerings, your enemies are destroyed, and they " are not. Your spirits are on their thrones, [and your] " souls are on their places.' They say unto Ra, Adora'

"tions be unto thee,


"

Ra-Khuti

Hail to thee,
!

thou Soul who art protected in the earth

Hail to

" thee, as
" "

being eternity, the lord of the years and of

the everlastingness which hath no diminution.'

Their
of

food consisteth of offerings, their drink

is

cool

" water,
"

and there

is

lamentation to

them when they


is

hear their doors close upon them.

Their food

given

"to them from the goddess Mu-sta(?) by Tesert-baiu."

The paragraph which


gods reads
"
"
:

refers

to

the jackal-headed

[These are] they

who come
of the
is

forth from this lake

whereunto the souls

dead cannot approach by


therein.

" "

reason of the sanctity which


:

That which belongeth to you saith Ra


'

Unto them
[to do],

ye

" gods

who

are in this lake,


;

is

to

keep guard upon your


on the edge
thyself,

" lives in

your lake

your offerings are under the guard


set themselves
: '

" of the jackals " of "


" "

which have

your

lake.'

They say unto Ra Immerse


of

Ra, in thy holy lake, wherein the lord of the gods

immersed himself, whereunto the souls


approach not
;

the dead

this is

what thou

thyself hast

com-

"manded,
" their

Kiiuti.'
is

Their food consisteth of bread,

drink

[made] of the red [barley], and their

THE GODS OF THE LAKE OF

LIFE, ETC.

I3I

The Twelve Gods who carry

their Doubles

-r:;;Sav^^IPg^tlf:\^fr^lllKS5g)*

I?-

IrJlD^illiilO. .:uJIl^ilPji^

The Twelve Gods

of the

Lake

of Life.

The Ten Living Uruoi

of

tlie

Lake

of the Uraei.


132
" vessels of
" tation "

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


drink are
filled

with wine.

There

is

lamen-

among them when they hear


Their food
is

their doors close

upon them.

given nnto them as lord[s]


this lake."
:

" of their sceptres

round about

The paragraph which refers to the uraei reads


" "

[These are] they


to them,

who have

their speech after

Ea

cometh

and souls are turned backwards, and


of the

"shadows are destroyed at the hearing


" (or, voices) of "

the uraei.
to

Unto them
[to do],

saith

Ea:

'That
fires [so

words

which belongeth

you

ye Uraei who are

" in this lake, is to "

guard your flames and your

that ye

may

hurl them] against

my

(literally, his)

" enemies,

and your burning heat against those whose

"mouths are
" "

say unto

Ea Come
:

evil.
'

Hail to you,

Uraei.'

They

thou to

us,

stride thou over

Tanen.'

"

On

the left of

the path of

the

boat of

the

sun

through the Fourth Division we see the god

Osiris, in

mummied
of

form, and wearing on his head the crown

the

South, standing on

a serpent, and partially


;

covered by the earth of a mountain


is

his

head only

above the ground, and he stands in a naos with a

vaulted dome.
^yft,
is

His name or

title,

Khent Amenti,
is

written by his side.

Before the shrine

Flame-goddess in the form


are twelve gods,

of a uraeus,

and behind her

who
is

stand in front of
of

Heru-ur

(or,

Horus the Aged), the Haroeris


writers.

the later Greek a hawk-headed

Heru-ur

in the form, of


THE GODS OF THE
man,
PITS

I33
the shrine
are

who

leans

on

staff.

Behind

which contains Osiris stand


described as
"

twelve gods,

who

the gods

who

are behind the shrine,"

mi'f''^^IVS*
side of each of

Behind, or by the side

of these, are four pits or hollows in the ground,

by the

which stands a god, with

his

body bent

forward in adoration before a bearded god, who holds


the symbol of
left.

life in

the right hand and a sceptre in the


called " Masters of their pits,"
''''-'^,
I I I I I
I

The four gods are

and their lord


"^

is

called the "

Master

of

Earths (?),"

"^ %^
:

The

texts referring to these gods read

C30

0=:::

lllll

::==tajs;

'^'^VV

Z^JimJoi -^^ ^
I

rl

<71

11

4ci

AAVSAA

ft

I'

<=>

^^^3^ Ml
i-
,

A/V^/^A

'^

LT ^^^ LZm

III

6r-^

sy o o

11^

^^
'^

/\AA/V\A

iit^^iJ5i^^kwi:if

134
A'.

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

^Kf]Sfy
B \'=^
o ^
I

AJ
ra D ^^z^

f^^^
(p

**

'0'

iiilV^W'
^ w
N\N\NS

liiiYm^l u^nl
J\

D D

(i w
fl

7^

^
01
AAA/VV\
I
I

tkl

AAAA/V\
I
I

AWVNA
I I
I

Ji

III

i~^^~~i

[331
(0

^
o
I

AAAAAA
I I I

^,

l^H
I

^"^

A/V\AAA
I I I

^^
II
I

AAA/W\
I
I

3)

A^
I

AA^AyV\ /^AAAAA

lll^=<CZ:>^

111

Jl

A
w

/VWWV A'^WW

/w^ryvK

^1

/= 1


OSIRIS

"

I35

KHENT-AMENTI

W .^^
I

++

^^'^
I

III

<=:>

.vwwv

^ O

^ <c^

)y

II

II

TT

/VVWV\ AAAAAA

fl

*~

AAA/VV\

AAAAAA

AAAAAA

"W
:

/T

The
"

text referring to Horus reads "Horus worketh on behalf of his

father Osiris, he

performeth magical ceremonies for him, and restoreth

" to

him the crown

[,

saying],

'

My

heart goeth out to

" thee, "

my

father, thou

who

art avenged on those

who would work

against thee, and in all the matters


art

"which

concern thee thou

guided

by magical

" ceremonies.

Thou hast the mastery, Osiris, thou "hast the sovereignty, Khenti Amenti, thou hast
" "

whatsoever

is

thine as Governor of the Tuat,

thou

whose forms

(or, attributes)

are exalted in the hidden

"place; the beatified spirits hold


"

thee in fear, and

the dead are terrified at thee.

Thy crown hath been


thy son

"restored
"

unto

thee,

and

I,

Horus, have

reckoned thy weakness

there.'

The twelve gods who are


Khenti Amenti say
" "
:

in front of the shrine of

Let

Him

of

the
!

Tuat be exalted

Let Khenti
restored to

Amenti be adored

Thy son Horus hath


136
" thee

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


thy crown, he hath protected thee by means of

"magical ceremonies, he hath crushed for thee thine


"

enemies, he hath brought to thee vigour for thy arms,


Osiris,

"

Khenti Amenti."

In reply to this address of the twelve gods Khenti

Amenti
"
" " "

saith unto his son

Horus

Come to me, those who work


that
is

my

son Horus, and avenge

me on
to

against me, and cast

them

him
is

over the things which destroy, [for]


destruction]."

it

he

who guardeth the pits [of Then saith Horus unto


:

those gods

who
who

are behind

the shrine

"Make
"

inquisition for me,

gods

are in the

" following of

Khenti Amenti, 'stand ye up, and withlive delicately

draw ye not yourselves, and be ye masters over


and come, and
on the bread

" yourselves,
" of " " " "

Hu, and drink ye upon that whereon


to

of the ale of

Maat, and live ye


there.
is

my

father liveth

That
to be

which belongeth
Ka.

you

in the

hidden place

behind the shrine, according to the commandment of


I call unto you,
it is

and behold,

it is

for

you

to

do

"

what

your duty

[to do].'

Their meat consisteth


is

"of cakes of bread, and their ale


" drink, "
"

of

the tchesert
cool water.

and

their libations are


is

[made with]
shrine.

Their food
the things

given unto them by the guardian of

which are in the


:

" saith

unto these gods

And Horus
of

'

Smite ye the enemies

my

" father, " of

and hurl ye them down into your

pits because

that deadly evil which they have done against the

The Twelve Gods before the Shrine.

Heni-ur.

^=1 .^j>vsff5''a?vrffi!sllt/^J t S
Osiris

The Twelve Gods behind the Shrine.

KhentAmenti.

The goddess of Flame


(Nesert).

issxs;

^^

'^^

fli'*

^^^^i^

''****

^'^^

-^^ ^M

(^ .3^

The Master
of Earths.

The Four Masters

of their Pits.

138
"

FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


(?)

Great One, [which] found

him

that

begot me.
is

" " "

That which belongeth


guard the pits

to

you

to

do in the Tuat

to

of fire according as

and I

set [this] before

you

so

Ka hath commanded, that, behold, ye may do


[to
do].'

"according to what belongeth to you


"

This

god standeth over

(or,

by) the

pits."

139

CHAPTER

VI.

THE GATE OF TEKA-HRA.


The Fifth Division of the Tuat. The
boat of the sun having passed through the Fourth

Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway which


leads to the Fifth Division.
to

This gateway

is

similar
is

that

which guards the Fourth Division, and


by nine
gods,

guarded
"

who

are

described

as
to

the the

Fourth Companv," '^

at

the

entrance

corridor

and at

its

exit stands a jackal-headed god, the


o

former being called Aau, Tekmi, ^zi^


[1 (1
;

^^

v\ and the
,

latter

each

is

said to " extend his


is

arms and
of fire,

hands
as

to Ra."

The

corridor
is

swept by flames
Arit,
(J

before.

The gateway
says,
"

called

nn

and the text


"

This great god cometh to this


it,

gateway, and entereth in through

and the gods


fl
|

"

who
I

are therein acclaim him,"

<=:zr>

fl

<~~>

1^-^

ViC^

AAA/V\^

V1

111

1 "H"

^^^

P-

^^'' ''"'' sods say to


140
Ea,
" "

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

Ea-Heru-khuti unfoldeth our


Hail, Ea,

doors,

and openeth
great
tzs:
I I I

our gateways.
god, ^

come thou
-mmnr

to us,
A/WVV\

lord

of

hidden

nature,"

^^

Tnnnir
| I
|

^i

J^
A
3

nwn

The monster serpent


is

whicli stands on his


i j

tail

and guards the gateway


lines of text
"

called Teka-hra,

^,

and the two


of
"
:

Ea read
satth to

which

refer to his admission

He who

is
:

Sa

Teka-hra

Open thy gate


'

over this door openeth to Ea.


to Ea, unfold

"
"

thy doors to Khuti, that he


thick darkness, and

may send light may make his radiance


This door
is
it,

into the

illumine

"

the hidden habitation.'

shut after the

"great god
"

hath passed

through

and

there

is

lamentation to those

who

are in this gateway

when

"

they hear this door close upon them."


is

As

the hiero-

glyphic text
p.

identical

with that given above on

120

it is

not repeated here.


of this Division
its

In the middle
being towed on

we

see the boat of

Ea
the

way by

four gods of the

Tuat

god

is

in the

same form
In front

as before,

and stands
in the bows,

in a shrine

enveloped by Mehen.
at the stern.

Sa stands
of tliose

and Heka

who tow

the boat are nine

shrouded gods, with

])r()jccting

elbows; each of these

holds in his hands a part of the body of a long, slender serpent,

and the group

is

called " those

who hold Ennutchi,"

\\^^:T3^\\^(smm
If

1i

''

*--

-*

* -*- '**'-

The.Gate of the Serpent Tcka-lira,

142

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

twelve bearded beings,

who

are advancing towards a god,


angle,"
zi
J

who
the

is

styled [the god]

" of his

CTID

twelve gods are described as Baiu reth-ammui.e.,

TUAT,

"

the souls of the


I I

men who
u
II

are in the Tuat,"


texts read
:

The
.

i<

rzDJ

The Boat

of

Ra being towed by

the Gods of the Fifth Division of the Tuat.

-^-^

Jf

II
III

W
VS\

^
I

ra
/VWV\A
III

t>^

o D

fl

A/WVV\

X
1

,vww\ PIII
I

A M
I

J^
'^VV/^V^ AAAA/V\
I

AAAAAA

AAAAAA
I

^ AAAAAA
I

|c=^^

U|

|<^
AAA/V\A

Ji

^11

II z]

_^

=0"

II

nnnmri
!

10

r~vn
.-^-^

^ O

m
.(5

DESCRIPTIVE TEXTS

143

B
D D

/WWW
I I I

y\

rJ

/wvw\

ox
<=>

^
I
I

/WW\A

O
1

(3

LU

(^

Ib
'

Jl

A^V\^W\
I I
I I

AAA/\AA
ll
I I I

A/^W\A

(2
t|

A^W^A^

n AAAAAA
I

II

<^<;

^^^^lil^flV
/VA/VVV\
I I I

^
I I I

I
I I

/WWW

^
s

<=>
Q.
I

T1m?f]?
AATSAAA A/NA/VV\
1
1 I I I
I

rrrn
II

II

1^11!

'^

/^Ay\AA^

\
A/VVAA

"^
AVyvW
I

,;;
1
I

^ III''

/>A/WW

Jc^^

wo
A^^^y\A
A^^\AA/\

./^.
AAAAA'N

A'WWi
/V^VW\ AAAAAA /^AWSA^

II

J
AAA/VW
I I I

AAAAAA
I
I I

AAAAAA

Jc^1i\iM^Yl^-

"

144

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

"The gods of the Tuat draw along this great god, "and he journeyeth through the hidden place. [Ea
" saith
:

'

Draw ye me
;

along,

ye gods of the Tuat, ye

"and sing
" of

praises unto me,


let

who
of

are at the head


(or, vigorous),

the stars

your cords be strong

"and draw ye me along by means


"
"

them, and

let

your hands and arms be steady,


your
legs, let

let there

be speed in

there be strong intent in your souls,

" "

and

let

your hearts be glad.

Open ye a prosperous
hidden things.'

way

into the

chambers

{qerti) of

The Nine Gods who hold Ennutchi.

The

text relating to the bearers of the serpent reads

"Those who are

in this scene carry this serpent.

them and advanceth towards them to " make himself to rest in [the gateway called] Nebtstriketh
"

"Ea

AHAU,

This serpent travelleth as far as

it (i.e.,

this

"gateway), but he passeth not beyond


" "

unto them
give

it.

Ea

saith
there,

'

Strike ye the serpent

Ennutchi

him no way [whereby to escape], so "pass by you. Hide your arms, destroy

that I

may

that which

HUMAN SOULS OF THE TUAT

I45

"you guard, protect that which cometh into being " from my forms, and tie ye up (or, fetter) that which
"cometh
into being from

my

strength.'

Their food

" consisteth of the

hearing of the word of this god, and


to

" offerings are


"

made

them from the hearing

of the

word
"

of

Ea

in the Tuat."

" true " of

Unto those who have spoken what is right and upon earth, and who have magnified the forms
the god,
Itii

saith

Praises
'

shall

be [sung] to

Heri-qenbet-f.

The souls

of

meu who

are in the Tuat.

"

your

souls,

and there
shall

shall be breath to your nostrils,


to

"and there
"

be

you joints in Sekhet-aru.

That which

shall be indeed yours is


CxODS.
(or,

" to the

Maati

what belongeth The habitations which shall be


where
[live]

"yours shall be
"

are) at the corner

those

who

are with
is

me who weigh words

for them.'
of

"Their food

of

bread-cakes,

and their drink

" tchesert drink, " Offerings

and

their libations are of cool water.

are
II.

made unto them upon

earth as to the

VOL.


146
"

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


to

god IJetepi, according

what should be

offered unto

" them."

Ea
"

saith unto this god

"

Let him that

is

over his

Corner (Heri-qenbet-f) cry out to those souls who

" are right,

and

true,

and

divine,

and make them

to sit

"at peace in their habitations at the Corner


"

of those

who

are with myself."

On

the right hand of the path of

Ea

in the Fifth

Division of

the Tuat are


;

1.

Twelve male beings


"

bowing in adoration

they are described as


in
2.

those
1

who make
(1

adorations
'^'^
I

the

Tuat,"

'

'-'

(1(1

^^

- -

\\

^
;

Twelve male beings who bear


of

in their

hands a cord for measuring plots


these are called
"

ground

and

estates

Holders of the cord in


3.

the Tuat,"

^%i^%Se|\^"^.
hand, and a sceptre in the
texts

Four

gods, standing upright, each holding the

symbol
left.

of life

in his

right

The

hieroglyphic

which

relate

to

these

groups

read
/WWV\
I

ni
^'^'^^^ AAA^AA
I
I

O
Jr

O
I

(ii

111

m
o

^-=^
r\

c^
^-^

II
r,

_Mir iJi^zD
h

/?

j iii

ii i .

aaa/w\ AA^^^^

A^A/^AA
I

W A

J
"D

t^ Jl

%^
<=>

(5

111

''''^

n
I I I

-^iz^

^ SGiiPl

GODS
^^

WHO MEASURE LAND AND THEIR OVERSEERS


^AAA^^
I
I

I47

AAAAAA
I \

II

^
TK
1

II

^N

111^

A/VAA-V^

]\
lO

^^

-H

-^

AAAAAA,

^ D
I I

A^:^m^eio
AAAAAA AVNAAA
I I I

oiuy
niH
I I

\=^ CJ^m

AAAAAA AAAAAA

^
m
'
I

^AAA

A^WAA

II
(p
r\
'
'

ra
.iiiimiii.

AAAAAA P^^'^'^

^
"
'
I

AAAA/V\

'^
AAAAAA
LI
I

D
r~
\

III
'

AAAAAA
I
I

A^/w^^

_/J

aaaaaa

(2

(^ /^

i5^ *^ --*

/VVWNA

IJ

-^
XlwlwII'm
/vvvvv\ AA/W\A
^<t=^fc

yiii<=><^ n

II

il

nil

Jriii

T
^
A^V\AAA
III
I I

'^

AAAAAA

l_>
f^ |^

AAA/W\

/WVAAA AAAAAA
I

0/l_
I

AAyvvv\

(a

tt-^ ^4^ -<o-

i'

AAA/W\
I
I I

AAAAAA
1
I I

"^

llllZSZlj

M
I

^^^

^^= Q
II

-^

^
I

III

III

A/V^AAA
I I I

--

A^VW\

^
II

A/AAAA
I
I

^H^^^
iii^izz^m
I I

cO]

r=^

^ w
AA/V^A
I I I

c=>
Ci
"'"iin^
I

III

M
III!

-O.

1^

f\

II

g^lk


148
I

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


AAAAAA iCN
.

Ci

n
tl
AA/\^\A

(p

ft

/-^

<

'>
I I

^AAAAA

^
isrv\/~jvs
I

b e

^ ^
L_
I

i\;\r^/\/\f\

-^
\.
III

'V\^/V\A

1
A'WVN^
tl

111

1^1

l\.

111

'^M^A\u^mm'^m\^Bi^L\^^um*\m'i'

The Twelve Gods who make adoration

iu the Tunt.

ft

M-

^111

^h.

(^

The passage
reads
"
:

in the text

which

refers to the adorers

[These are] they

who make songs

to

Ra

in

Amentet

"and
" "

exalt Heru-khuti.
earth,

[These are they w'ho]

knew

Ra upon

and who made

offerings imto liim.

Their offerings are in their place, and their glory


THE GODS OF THE MEASURING CORD
" is

149

in
:

" "

Ea

' :

the

holy place
thou,
!

of

Anient.

They say unto

Come

Ea, progress through the Tuat.

Praise

he to thee

Enter thou among the holy

" [places] "

them

There
'

with the serpent Mehen.'


are offerings for you,

Ea

saith

unto

ye who made

" offerings.
"

I I

am

content with what ye did for me,

both when

used to shine in the eastern part of

"

heaven, and
of

when

was sinking
Their food

to
is

rest

in

the

"chamber

my

Eye.'

of

the bread-

The Twelve Gods who hold the cord

for

measuring land.

"cakes
"

of Ea,

and their drink

is

of his tclieser drink,

and

their

" offerings " for

the

are made of cool water, and made unto them on the earth in [return] praisings which they make unto Ea in Anient."
libations

are

The passage
of the
" " "

in the text

which
:

refers to the holders

measuring cord reads

[These are they who] hold the measuring cord in

Anient, and

they go over therewith the


the beatified spirits).

fields

of to

the

Khu

(i.e.,

[Ea saith


150
"

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


:

them]

Take
'

ye the cord, draw

it

tight,

and mark

"out the limit


" the

(or,

passage) of the fields of Amentet,

Khu

whereof are in your abodes, and the gods

"

whereof are on your thrones.'

The

" are in

the Field of Peace, [and] each


is

Khu of JSTeterti Khu hath been


Eighteousness

"judged by him that


" is to those

in the cord.

who are (i.e., W' ho exist), and unrighteous" ness to those who are not, Ea saitli unto them " What is riglit is the cord in Ament, and Ea is
:

'

"content with the stretching


-

(or,

>>...^T-7-M-"*' .F'
...V

" "

drawing)

of

the

same.

Your
ye gods. ye

-.

..,,._......

..

possessions are yours,

TT^'i^'j"^

"

your homesteads are yours,

^i^V^^gg
C^iyiDiii^

"Khu.
"(oi*.

Behold

ye,

Ea maketh
fields,

worketh)

your

and
with

" "

he commandeth on your behalf


that there

may

be sand

(?)

"you."'
The Four Henbi Gods.
" Hail, " verily

joumcy

OU,

KHUTI,

for

the gods are content with

" that
"

which they

possess,

and the

Khu

are content

with their homesteads.


Sekhet-Aru, and
their

Their food
offerings

[conieth]

from

" "
"

from that which

springeth up therein.

Offerings are
of

made unto them


:

upon earth from the estate

Sekhet-Aru."
saith

To the four bearded gods Ea


" "

"

Holy

are ye,

Henbi

gods, ye overseers of the cords in Amentet.


fields
(i.e.,

[0 stablish ye

and give [them]


spirits)
[after]

to the gods

and
been

"to the

Khu

they have


THE FOUR RACES OF MEN
"
"

' , .

15I
fields

measured

in Sekhet-Aaru.

Let them give

and

sand to the gods and to the souls who "Their food shall be from Sekhet-Aaru, and their " offerings from the things which spring forth therein]."
are in the Tuat.

On
1.

the left of the path of the boat of

Ea

are:

hawk-headed

god, leaning
2.

upon a

staft^;

he

is

called Horns,

^.
Aamu, )
,

Four groups, each group confirst

taining four men.

The

are Retii,
^

the second are

^^

"^

the tliird are Nehesu,

and the fourth are Themehu,

^^ ^

The Reth

are Egyptians, the

Aamu

are dwellers in

the deserts to the east and north-east of Egypt, the

Nehesu

are the black races and Negkoes, and

the

3. Twelve The.mehu are the fair-skinned Libyans. hands both with grasps whom of each beings, bearded

the body of
"

long serpent;
of

these

are called

the
I

Holders of the period

time in Anient,"

^^ ^ ^
who
^5

^^.

4.

Eicjht bearded gods,

are

called the " Sovereign chiefs of the Tuat,"

U ^ Jj

^^

The hieroglyphic text which


:

relates to these

groups reads

'^I-^i^l.^iSflii

152

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


<f

^i^ ^
/WVA/V\

AArVW^ A^WvAA

V^

www

AV^WN /WWV\

IV'
I

l/WVW\J AAA/^^A

A'V\/VV\
I I I

^
-H_0
I I

^
^ D
AAAAAA A^A/W\

^
\X

o t.

AA/W\A

.^/^/^/v^A
1

^^AA^^

h
A^/v\'^^
I I I

l?:^

A/VSAAA

^ VX

O
III

'0,fK'l4 ^\
I

n
/= ^
I
AA^,

cz:zi
I

<=:>
H
(2

^
I

i-^"

n?

-*

A/^v\AA

Ci ^ jf^ III r^^^^ 111^ W /WWW

('^u) -(0-

o
'^.-^^

^
_ix\j>
I I

Y A O

1^

y
^^^
I

AAAA/V\

II

II

^
1

===

{\

A\

t^ (^

III

^ III

/^vwv\
AAA/VV\
I

v/VWV
I I

Wr

THE FOUR RACES OF MEN

153

AWA ,^^

>

^*VWWVW"

^r^l

l^9

'-K

The Aamu,

i.e.,

Asiatics.

The Reth,

i.e.,

Eo-jiitians.

Horns.

.vwwv^

-.14-$

'^^^^

-- 217

^^ "^^^ \.^

The Thomelui,

i.e.,

Libyaus,

The

Neliesu,

i.e.,

Xegroes.


154

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


A^^A/v^

H
I

*i

III ^

III

^^
I

o
J

^^^
II
I

AAAAAA

iJ

<::=>

^ o

sl

X
AA/WV\
''''^AA/NA

A
/^\/^./\/\/\

^
I

A/VWV\

1_

The passage which


Horus

refers to the four groups, each


:

containing four men, reads

saith unto the creatures of

Ea who

dwell in

the r.lack

Land (Qemt,
of the

i.e.,

Egypt) and in the Eed


lie

Land

(i.e.,

the deserts which

on each side of the


the Nile):

Black Land formed


"

mud of

"Magical
who
is

"protection be unto you,

ye creatures of Ka,

have come into being from the Great One who


the head of heaven
!

at

"

Let there be breath to your

" nostrils,
"

and

let

your linen swathings be unloosed


the eye of

Ye are the tears ^ of " name of Eeth (i.e.,


"ye have come
" " (or,

my

splendour in your
of issue
(

men).

Mighty

Aa-mu)

into Ijeing in your


it is

Sekhet hath created them, and


avengeth) their souls.

name of Aamu; slie who delivereth


of thou-

I masturbated [to produce

" you], "

and
[of

was content with the hundreds

sands

beings]

who came
*

forth from

me

in

your

Or, the wcejjinj


THE GODS WHO GIVE LIFE
"

155
to

name "come
"souls.

of

Nehesu

(i.e.,

Negroes)
it is

Horns made them

into being,
I

and

he who avengeth their

sought out mine Eye, and ye came into

being in your
"

name of Themehu

Sekhet hath created

them, and she avengeth their souls."

The passage which


stable

refers to the gods


life

who make

the

period

of

(Kheru-aiiau-em-Ament)
permanent) the duration

reads

Those who make firm

(or,

The Twelve Gods

of Life in

Ament.

of life stablish the days of the souls [in]

Amenti and

possess

the

destruction.
" are the

(or, command) of the place of Ea saith unto them " Inasmuch as ye gods who dwell in the Tuat, and who have

word

"possession of
"

[the serpent]

Meterui, by means
life of

of

whom

ye mete out the duration of

the souls

"who

are in

Amenti who

are
of

condemned

to destruc-

" tion, destroy

ye the souls

the enemies according


156
" to " to

FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


the place of destruction which ye are
appoint,

commanded
the

and

let

them

not

see

hidden

" place."

The passage
"

in the text
:

which

refers to the divine

sovereign chiefs reads

[Here are] the divine sovereign chiefs who shall

" destroy the enemies.

They

shall

have their offerings

V^^
*'

-U

<=>
<

'*~T Aww* /'MMii

^ ^\Jmm-

Rr.*--'.

/>*WA .^tZ.

The Ei^ht
"

Soverein-n Chiefs in the Tuat.

by means
have

of the
tlieir

word [which becometh] Maat


oblations

they

" shall "

npon earth by means


MaJit,

of the

word [which becometh]


duration of the

and

it

is

they

who

" destroy

and who pass the edict concerning


life of

(literally,

" write) the


" in

the souls
is

who dwell

Amenti.

The destruction which

yours shall be

" [directed]

against the enemies, and the power to write

THE EIGHT SOVEREIGN CHIEFS


"

I57

which ye possess

sliall lie for

the place of destruction.

" I

have come, even I the great one Horus, that I


a reckoning with

"make
" " bread,

shoot forth evils against

my my

body, and that I


enemies.

may may
is

Their food

and their drink


cool

is

the tchcscrt wine, and they


(or,

"have
" "

water wherewith to refresh


[Offerings are

bathe)
earth.
^

themselves.

made

to

them upon

One doth not enter into the place of destruction.]


J

Supplied from ChampoUiou,

Noiicei^, p. 772.

158

CHAPTEE

VII.

THE JUDGMENT HALL OF

OSIRIS.

The Sixth Division of the Tuat.

The boat
Division of

of

Ra having
Tuat

passed

through the Fifth

the

arrives at the
or,

gateway which
the
text says:

leads to the

Sixth Division,

as

_A

<:II>

,WWV\

.J

<:i

'

AAAA/NA

-'
I

'

"
"

cometh forth
it,

to this pylon,

and he passeth in through

and those gods who are in the secret place acclaim

"him."

The gateway
forms,

is

guarded by twelve bearded

mummy

who

are described as the "gods

and
Pn
'

goddesses

who
r
J
I

are in this pylon,"

\\\
^^

^^^^

^^

'^

Hlr V'
Y

"^
'

^^^

^^

called

Nebt-aha,
the

The

gate

which

admits

to

Sixth
at

Division resembles

those

already

described;
its

the

entrance to the

corridor

and at
the

exit

stands

bearded
Maa-A]!,

mummied

form,

former

being

called

ot^, and the latter Sheta-ab,


"

^,
and

These names mean

Eight

(or,

true) of heart "

THE JUDGMENT HALL OF

OSIRIS

159

ilUlM^^S: mM5L-kMB^Mm\\^

m
ail
'WWW

rmy
Ittitliiitiiiiii^i

mmm

I"

in

The Judgment Hall

of Osiris.

The Gate

of the

Serpent Set-em-moa-f.


l6o

SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


of

"Hidden

heart" respectively, and each

is

said to
is

extend his hands and arms to Ra.

The

corridor

swept by flames.
"

The gods who acclaim the god


thou who art at the head

say,

Come thou

to us,

of the

" horizon,

great god,

who

dost open the hidden place.

"

Open thou the holy

doors,
--_fl

and unfold the portals


ffUl

of

"the hidden place,"

^__^ Pf",
1

^
I

\\

^1

ll

^^ "^^ \/ ^S S U
I

^=*^
1
I

lllllllll

<d=>

MU 11

1=^^^ nmnnr AW.AA liilMiJ

s
the

Between

tlie

gate

which

leads

into

Sixth

Division and the Division

itself

we

find inserted a

remarkable scene, which

may

be thus described:
is

In the upper part, from one side to another, a line

drawn, which

is

intended to represent the roof of the


is

shrine or canopy in wliich the god


rests

seated,
,

and on

it

row

of

kakheru v

(j

i.e.,

spear-head

ornaments.

From

the inside of the roof hang, upside


of

down, four heads

some kind

of

horned animal.
(1 fl
i

These are called Hahaiu

FD '^^ FD "^^ "^^


^

>

and are supposed

to

be heads of gazelle

or oxen.

In

the space between the spear -head ornaments and the


side of the

Tuat

is

written

TJ^T
The
Ser her Tuat sath then ; the meaning
1

transliteration of these characters appears to be


of the first three
ii.,

" Tetes de gazelles" (Cliamiiollion, Monuments, torn,

p. 495).

THE JUDGMENT HALL OF


words
is

OSIRIS

l6l

tolerably clear,

i.e.,

" Osiris,

governor of the
is doul)tful.

Tuat," but the signification of the last signs

M. Lefebure
of

translates the inscription, " Osiris, master


Osiris,

Hades, Earth, and Tanen."

who wears

the

double crown of the Suutli and North, and holds in his


right

hand the symbol

of " life,"

and

in his left a sceptre,


is

is

seated on a chair of state, which

set

on the top

of a platform with nine steps.

On

each step stands a


as the "
i

god,

and the nine gods are described


is

company

which

with

Sai;,

i.e.,

Osiris,"

(^

- - c^

%,

On
is

the topmost step

is

a Balance, in which the actions


;

of the deceased are

weighed

the

beam

of the

Balance

supported cither by the deceased, or by a stand


is

which

made

in the

form

of a

bearded munnny.

One

pan

of the

Balance contains some rectangular object,


figure' of the bird

and the other a


of evil

which

is

symbolic
is

and wickedness.
is

Behind the IJalance

a boat,
;

which
it is

away from the presence of Osiris in a pig being driven along by a dog-headed ape
sailing
stick.

which nourishes a
is

In the top left-hand corner

a figure of Anubis, jackal-headed, and under the


of

fioor

the platform on wliicli Osiris


of

is

seated are

figures

the
this

enemy

of

Sar, or
is

Osiris.

From

the

variant of

scene which

found on the sarcoas

phagus

of

Tchehra at
I.,

Baris,^

well

as

from the

sarcophagus of Seti

we may

see that the pig in the

Sharp, Inscri;ptions,

xaart

ii.,

pi. 0.

VOL.

II.


l62
boat
is

SIXTH DIVISION OF
called

" ;

THE TUAT
"Eater
of the

Am-a, 7
is

a, i.e.,

Arm,"

and the boat


in the bows.

piloted

by a second ape which stands

On
tlie

the Paris
in

monument we
threatening

see a

man

wielding

hatchet

manner and
of

standing near
destroying
the

Scales, probably
if

with the view of


Osiris

deceased

the judgment

prove adverse to him.

The nine short


read
:

lines of text at the foot of the scene

111

/C\

2^-=^

q
I

o ^
fl\

-?

''=u)

=>
I I I

O W

III

_^
n

IB^
o-

s=5 W

1-9

J&*""

^^1

^^^s^lll
in

TV^i^iTV
This
inscription
is

the
first

so-called

"

enigmatic

writing,^ a fact

which was
of
it

noticed by ChampoUion,

but a transcrij)t

exists

on the sarcophagus

of

Tchehra in characters which have the ordinary

values,-

and

this reads as follows

^111
1

(i)

J[m.

c=i=;=.

.<s>-

ci

^.^^.^^

il ^^ii:=ir

www

See (jioodwin, Aeg.

Zcit.,

1873, p. 138; llcuoiif, ibid., 187-1, p. 101


pi. 272.

and ChampoUion, Monuments,


^

Lefebure renders, "

O yc who

briny the word just or false to


vol.
x.,

nie, he,
p. 111).

Thoth, examines the words" {llecords of the Fast,


THE JUDGMENT HALL OF

OSIRIS

163

5=>
" the

rvi~i

o>

--

>,^

I.e.,

"

His enemies are under his

" feet,

the gods and the spirits are before

him

he

is

enemy

of the

dead

(i.e.,

the damned)

among the

"beings of the Tuat, Osiris putteth under restraint


" [his] enemies,

he destroyetli them, and he pcrformeth

" the slaughter of them."

The text which

refers to

Anubis reads

and

this

Mr. Goodwin transcribed

l|

^_

^ *^^-,
of

i.e.,

"Hail,
little

ye who make to be madt


one,

"the word
" words,

your

may Thoth weigh


the short inscription

the

may he make

to eat his father."


is
:

Immediately over the boat

This Goodwin renders by,


"

"

[When]
i

this

god entereth,

he

(i.e.,

the Ape) riseth and putteth under restraint


the Eater of the Arm)."

"

Am-a
1

(i.e.,

"

The diver [when]

tliis

yoil rises,

he gives up [the pig] to the

plagues"

(Let'ebui-e, op. cit., p. 114J.


164

^
:

SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


})air of scales is

Behind the

the following legend

This

]\Ir.

Goodwin

transcribes by

A/WWN

CT^

AAAAAA

0^^
I I

Zl

7i

-B^
t* 'J

'^ ^.=^
[j^
*^^^
'

J] ^^Li^^

|_.^D
/vvvvv

^^=.
AAAAAA

\1.

AA/VWA

Ji^^^]! ^ ^U ^^ U J^ T
I I

7^e'"(l^/^'?^y^ '^,
"

and

renders,

The

Ijalance-bearer does

homage

the blessed spirits

" in

Amenti

follow

after

him
;

the
there

morning
is

star

" disperses

the thick
below.

darkness

good will
himself, he

" above, justice


" gives

The god reposes


reads, "

bread to the blessed,

who throng towards him."


The bearer
of

The
"

translation

by M. Lefebure
Amenti, [who]
tlie

the hatchet and


of

the bearer of the scales protect the

" inhaljitant " " " "

takes his repose

in

Hades, and traverses

darkness and the shadows.

Happiness

is

above,

and justice below.

The god

reposes and sheds light produced by truth which he

has produced."
'

See also CluuuiiuUiou, Monuments,

torn,

ii.,

p. 490.


THE JUDGMENT HALL OF
The upper part
of the space

OSIRIS

165

between the roof and


occupied
l)y
;

the platform on which Osiris

sits is

two
they

short inscriptions, which are full of difficulty

read

j=s
[

"
i

'

""
1

r\/^r\r^f^

^^>-

1 * SIt!^'^!!
f AThe meaning
of

these

texts

has puzzled several

workers, and even the order in which the characters


are to be read has given rise to differences of opinion.

One
on

of the chief

difficulties in

the matter

is

caused

by the way
the

in

which the two legends are written


of

sarcophagus

Seti

I.

Looking

at

the

hieroglyphics as they stand, they seem to form one

continuous inscription, but,


it

appears in

must divide

we examine the scene as the tomb of Rameses II., we see that we them as above. Mr. Goodwin made an
if

"


of the texts,

l66
attempt to

SIXTH DIVISION OF
transcrilie

THE TUAT

and translate a part

but as he considered them to form only one inscription

we cannot
I.

accept his rendering.

M. Lefebure has made


^
:

translations of both texts,


"

and they read

They, they hide those which are in the state of

" "
"

the elect.

They the country [belonging]


]^)ehold,

to them, is

Ameh
heads

in the land.
issue.

these are they whose


is
!

AYhat a mystery

their appearance,

" [tlie

appearance] of your images


"

II. " "

The examination

of the

words takes place, and

he strikes down wickedness, he who has a just heart, he who bears the words in the
examination
of the
scales, in the divine

" place of the


" of

mystery
rises

of mysteries

the

spirits.

The god who


all."

has

made

his

" infernal

[companions]
of of

For purposes

comparison, the versions of the texts

from the tomb

Eameses VI.,

as given

by Champollion
l)e

{Monuments,

pi.

252) are given.

It will

noted that

a part of the line immediately over the head of Osiris,

^^
ately
rV

Q
in

/wvAAA

^^

is

given in different
is
^

places in the latter scene, for


front
of

aX^

immedi-

the
is

double crown of

Osiris,

and
the

H l/m

A5\

^*=:>- '^'^^'^

111

immediately ^

in

front

of

sceptre of the god.

The other

lines read:
>(?)

'

Hecordis of

tlie

Past, vol. x., p. 11-1.

THE JUDGMENT HALL OF

OSIRIS

167

^"^^
II.
AAA^VV\

%^
/I

^^=^~>.
I I

^^ '^^n 1^ III
_/-l

"^
I 1 1

^^ '^''^
/wvw\
_/_i

_Ol\S

("=0)

i68

CHAPTER

VIII.

THE GATE OF SET-EM-MAAT-F.


The Sixth Division of the Tuat The pylon which
of the

continued.
The monster

gives access to the Sixth Division


described.

Tuat has already been

serpent wliich stands on his

tail

and guards the gate[l


,

way
two
read
"

is

called Set-em-maat-f,

and the

lines of text
:

which

refer to his admission of

Ra
Sa

He who
to

"saith
"

Set-em-maat-f: 'Open

is

over this

door openeth

to

Ra.

thy gate to Ra,

unfold thy doors to Khuti, that he


the thick darkness, and

" into

may send light may make his radiance


This door
it,

"illumine the hidden habitation.'


" after this great " is
"

is

shut

god hath passed through

and there

lamentation to those

who

are in this gateway

when

they hear this door close upon them

" (see p. 169).

rf--b

D n

/wwyv tx^^i^
II
I

>

jT

/srvw^

IIIIII

AV\/\/v\

U
I

"

"

-=^^3^

1^

II

"

^^

uumiJ

/wsAAA

lli

\\-

www ^

\\

Pi\^^Mi:i:^k^era ^c=^

I.

FRAGMENTARY TEXTS OF SETI

169

8(1V
in -^

J\

J\

1
'^^
iiiimrr
I

\^\\\rA
4
1

Sp

ra
1

A
Di\dsion of
in a

D.

The scenes and


trate

texts which ilhis-

the

Sixth

the

Tuat cannot be obtained


Seti

com-

plete state from the sarcophagus of


I.,

and recourse must therefore


to

be

had

other

documents.

In

the following pages, however, the

fragments of the texts and scenes

from the sarcophagus are first given,

and these are followed by the complete texts as they are found in the

tomb

of

Rameses

VI., as published

by Monsieur E. Lefebure in the third

volume of the Mi' moires of the French


Archneological Mission at Cairo.

L2li
may

The fragmentary
be thus descriljed

texts

and scenes
I.

from the sarcophagus


:

of Seti

In the middle register are


1.

Two

of

the four gods of the


it is to

Tuat whose duty


Division.

tow along

the boat of the Sun through this

The Serpent Set-em-maat-f,

lyO
2.

SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

The god

Te^i,

in the

form

of

an aged man,

with
3.

l)ent shoulders,

and leaning on a

staff.

The iackal-headcd standard


tied

called

Ea,

to

which are

two

"

enemies,"

who probably

repre-

sent the dannied.


4.

The two Utciiats,

^^^^, which
standard
it.

appear to be

keeping watch on the


5.

" enemies."

The
"

I'ackal-headed
'

called

Tem,

an

,
II

with two
G.

enemies

" tied to

A nmmmied
"^K^

form, with projecting elbows, called

Afat,
7.

^
standard
called

The

jackal-headed
^"^^^^^

Kheper,

M ^^'^
8.

^^^ "

enemies

" tied to it.

A mummied form, with projecting T....A,^||j(],orMET,g.'


9.

elbows, called

The jackal-headed standard


"

called Siiu,

()

rjj

with two
10.
H

enemies
r

" tied to

it.

^'^'^^

A mummied
.

form, with projecting elbows, called

Sent,
11.

The jackal-headed standard


"

called Seb,

"^^ J

^jj,

with two
12.

enemies

" tied to

it.

A mummied

form, with projecting elbows, called

Aqa-sa,

The names arc

siiiiplicd

from Champollioii,

Notices, p. 502.


FRAGMENTARY TEXTS OF SETI
13.
I.

171

The jackal-headed standard

called Sar,

(Osiris).i

14.

imimiiiied form, with projecting elbows, called

Aa-khei;(?),
15.

^"^
/i\(?)/

The

jackal -headed standard called

Heru,

vs.

IG.

A god

holding a sceptre called SiiEF-HRA,

<^.

The
reads:

text which refers to the above-mentioned fjods

* (D <=>
I I I

1L21Vnii^^^^1
I I I

7\

'

The names are supplied from Champollion,


Champollion's text reads
:

Notices, p. 502.

<cr>
Ji

[J

\J
4
I

AAA^^W

-Jj

/"/^^yvv

{Notices, torn,

ii.,

p. 503).

172

SIXTH DIVISION OF

THE TUAT

THE HARVEST

IN

THE KINGDOM OF

OSIRIS I73

^^\A

rii5;

U-lu

^L^^

.2 .rid


174

SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

IT^^V I
I I

LI
I

^
V

/y
-J>

'

'

'

/VvAAAA
I '

W \^
"^^
^*-'-

/V^V>AA

r~r>AAyv\

-~

AA/^^A

AAAAAA

^
I

n
1
I

n^^^^n
5CX
I I I I

-^

^
D

=111 ^

Hi'
" "

[This great god

is

towed along by the gods in the


say,
'

Tuat, and those

who tow Ea along

Rise np,

" disk,]

god, verily get thee forth to

" the standards of Seb.' "


'

Tern saith unto the standards

"

Keep ward over the enemies, and bind ye fast those who shall be smitten. ye gods who are behind the " standards, and who are in the following of Seb, I give
"

ye the power to bind fast the enemies and to keep

"
"

ward over the wicked.


under your hands,
let

Let them not go forth from them not slip through your

" fingers.

enemies, ye arc reckoned for slaughter

"according to the decree which [was given] to you by

him that with his body, and created the Tuat "by his members (?). He hath passed the decree for

"

"

THE HARVEST
" "

IN

THE KINGDOM OF

OSIRIS I75

you

to

be punished, and he taketh count of you and


'

what ye do The upper

register

is

much
I.
;

mutilated on the cover

of the sarcophagus of Seti


1.

on

it

we

see

Fi\-e upright

male

figures,

each of

whom

holds a

large loaf of bread,

with both hands on his head

when
in

the scene was complete these figures were twelve

number, as we learn from the variants published by

Champollion,^ and they are called Hetepti-khepeiiu,

^
2.

jm

im^wHi
I

Six upright male figures, each of

whom
his

holds the
;

feather of

Maat with both hands on


they are
called

head

when

the scene was complete these figures were twelve in

number, and

Autu-maamu-kheru-

The

text which remains reads

^ n^%.^^n?r.wmm
I I I

<=.

/wv/vv\
I I
I

Di

Mi
W
ii.,
III

AAAA^V\

^
M
I

11

111^

Q^^^i.^
ii.,

Notices,

p. 501. p. 502.

"

Supplied from Chaiapolliou, Notices,

176
"T"

SIXTH DIVISION OF

THE TUAT
AAAAAA
''
1

\/

/wwv\

v-A

"in

\/
AAAAAA AAAAAA AAAAAA
1

itlllli

"

"

[These arc they

who have

offered

up incense

to the

Fragnicut of the Cover of the Sarcophagus of Seti

I.

in the British

Museum.

" gods,
ll

and whose doubles


AAAAAA r\ c3
I

liave
-fX

been washed,
AAAAAA AAAAAA

-c2>"l

"

iyis=^Or <^z=>\\\
I

r/VW^
I I

llll

if

u f\\,r;^ M J Jf
I

Jf^O

H
I I

ij

" niafit,

they have been reckoned up and they are maat


THE HARVEST
"in the presence
" iniquities.

IN
of

THE KINGDOM OF
the gi'eat god,

OSIRIS 177
destroyeth
of

Osiris saith unto

them

Ye are madt
'

who

"

madt.

Tie

ye at peace [because of what] ye have

"done,
" in "

ye who are in the forms of those wlio are


following,

my

and who dwell in the house


Live ye on what ye live

of

him

whose souls are

holy.

" there,
" "

and have the mastery

over the cool waters which


are in your

Lake
I

'"

few years ago

pur-

chased from a native at Luxor


a fragment of
the cover of
I.

the sarcophagus of Seti


p.

(see

176);

this is

now

in the

IJritish

Museum (No. 29,948),


:

and
1.

it

gives the following


figures,

Three male

each

of

which bears a

loaf

on his

head.
2.

The

followino; fragment-

ary text:
I

u
I

II

Ji

(2

mpj cr^
S=J-^^ II Ml D
I

,1

III

mm i^#^,
VOL.
II.

"Their bread cakes are ordered for


178
" "

SIXTH DIVISION OF
their gods
;

THE TUAT
in their hands,

them by

their

han are

and they enter into their abodes at the pylon which


destroyeth
:

" "
"

them Your bread


'

its

gods.

The god Sar


shall be to

(Osiris) saith unto

you from that which


ye

cometh

forth

from your mouths,


'"
:

Hetepti-

"KHEPERU
1.

In the lower register are


Five male
figures,
;

very large ears of corn

who are occupied in tending when the scene was complete


of grain in

these figures were twelve in number, and they were


called, "
"

Those who work about the plants


1^1
j

the fields of the Tuat,"

[^ ^ ^ ^ ^]
\>
I

_BJ^
2.

'C)t.t)

_B^ iM^

LTZD
;

A man

holding a sickle

he

is

one of the seven


of

" reapers,"

^'^ "^ J ^ p^,


^
,

which

this

section of the scene originally consisted.

The
reads
:

text which relates to those

who tend
Q

the grain

ucs>AA/VW\
.1
I I

U^
/^

^^^

""**""

"

~~**~
/WNAAA

'"'^"'^

^
^

.www
I I 1

,^^==3
1

H jr ^ Jr
1,1 ^/^
'^'wvAA -^:z::7

(^^

v\

/I\

^-^
I

In

^
7r

<^~~=>

V.WVWS
I
I

M
1

Ji^^,^

^
I

^
1 1

m (s^
ill

,,,,^
Q.Q.Q.

(o

Jj

1^

W.WX

V\ (^^^^ w
I

...O
I 1 1

==3
1 I

.^^

s:r=i 'wwv^ ^-,1


1

0^

O
ii.,

511

The passage

iu brackets

is

from ChampolHou, Notices,

p. 503.

THE HARVEST

IN

THE KINGDOM OF

OSIRIS 179

WW MM
^

m^.

^'^\'^^^\Mr>^M
M

\i^

<i

plil,

HP/

'VWVV\ ^-s

iii^oooiinWiMi
0.1^

_M^ U t Jr X

^(?)

^
I

Jr

J^ ^000
-k^^.

^=0=

r^rsNsrsf\

h
1 I I

III

<rr>
AWVNA
fl
I
I I

-^^

/-Al^AAA

^ ^^
AATWVA

W
I
I

'
\^'

...Q

\
,

*
I
I

QQQ
.

"^^^^
I

^ "
I

n
I

/www
I

i?^f^^

III! Shi
I

II

M
II

^
il

[J^r>.
/\A/WW
I I I

'

.'"

II /WWW
zd

^^
iii
I

III
I

1^

DM
/WVvAA

ii
liMfllfl

^ o

^ w

crzD

ni.Jii^i

l80

SIXTH DIVISION OF
AAAAAA
I I I I I I

THE TUAT
*=^

^
r\

M
1
I

ra

NMMsNx
AA/VWV

^ ^
Jl

A ^
H
I

^^111
111

/=Z=Z

<=^

_ O

|\;

AAAAA^ AAAAAA
'

>

e^ ^===>
1
I 1
I

l_M^

EL m <-^ S_S^<I=> h

"

[They perform the works in connection with the


Their grain becometh glorious in

"grain, and they embrace the god of wheat (Nepra)


"

which

is

eaten

(?).

" the land


" "

through the light of Ea, when he appeareth,


his

and sendeth forth heat, and maketh

way by them.
:

The lord

of joy of heart saith

unto them

Let your
'

"grain be glorious, and "grain germinate, and


"
.
. . .

let the let

young shoots

of

your

your offerings be for Ea]


Let Neper germinate, and

there

....

Ea.

" let

Sar

(Osiris) be the source of food of the gods in

"the
"

Tuat
the Tuat.'

" fields of

Amenti .... behold, in the They gather together their grain,


:

and they say unto Ea

Let the
'

fields of

the Tuat be

"green with young plants.


"

May Ea shine upon the members of Sar (Osiris). When thou dost shine the great god, thou "young plants come into being,
" creator of the grain.'

Their offerings of food are of

"grain, and their drink offerings are of tcheser, and


" their libations
"

are

arc made with cool water. Offerings made unto them on the earth of the grain of the

" fields of

the Tuat."
in brackets are supplied

The words
p. 503.

from

Chaui])olliou, Notices,

ii.,


THE REAPERS
Of the reapers
" "

IN

OSIRIS l8l

THE KINGDOM OF
:

it is

said

These are they who have their scythes, and who


fiekls.

reap the grain in their


*

Ka

saith to

them

"

Take ye your

seythes,

and reap ye your

grain, for it

" is

granted to you

your habitations, and to

"join yourselves [to]


"

me

in the Circle of the

Hidden
is

Forms.

Hail to you,

ye reapers

'

Their food

of

" bread, " are "

and

their drink is of tcheser,

and

their libations

made with

cool water.

Offerings are

made unto
scythes in

them upon earth

as being those

who hold

" the fields of the

Tuat."
register of the

The text which describes the middle


Sixth Division as
reads
:

it

appears in the tomb of Rameses VI.

P]

T1
-e-

AAAA/V\

AA/WV\
I

/WW\A cq
I

p)

<2::-

_Hi^

.^^

J\

-J!

V1
^
k3
I

MH

'^
I I
I

^^mkf^qv-^n

l82

SIXTH DIVISION OF

THE TUAT

?^1 1:JI \:^^^:%lMl/^^


o

h^

II

AAAAAA

A^A/V\A

AAAAAA

-A^^\
I I I

^
' '

<=>

AAAAAA
I I I I

AAAAA^

Jj^

AAAAW\
"

AAA/V\A
I

AAAAAA, AAAAAA

AA/V\AA

mrTi<^:=>

\X^X

/VsAAAA

s
AA^^AA

kl
I

x^
I

AVvWV

AAAAAA

l*i
I 1
1 I

AAAAAA
fl

ci

^m

<^
I

III

J^
I

-<2>-

r^

ill

i^^^'^mol^^z:^

"This great god


"

is lieiiig

towed along hy

tlie

gods of
:

the Tuat, and those

who tow Ha along

say

Be
'

"

THE FETTERING OF THE WICKED


" exalted,
"

183

Aten

(i.e.,

Disk),

the Light, the


of the Tuat.

who art at the head of head .... Look ye at the


to you,

"abodes
"
"

Your eyes are

gods,

observe ye Ka, the Power in Akert.


decreeth your destinies.

This great god

This great god cometh forth

" to

the standards of Seb, which reckon up the enemies

" after the

weighing

of

words in Anientet.

Behold, Sa

"saith unto this god [when] he cometh forth to the

"standards of Seb
"

the head 'of Ea, the great

god ....

verily, get thee forth to the standards of

"Seb.
" " " " "

Teni saith unto the standards:

'Keep
who

ward
are to

over the enemies, and bind ye fast those

be smitten.

ye gods who are in

tlie

following of

the standards, and

who

are in the following of Seb, I

give ye power to bind fast the enemies, and to keep

ward

over the wicked

(or,

those

who

are

to

be

"

Let them not come forth from under your ye them not slip tlirough your fingers. " enemies, ye are doomed to slaughter, according to the
" smitten).

hands, let

"

decree of

Ea

concerning you.

His person

is

the body

" of "

Akert, and he hath created the Tuat

of his frameto

work.

He

hath issued the decree for you

be put

" into restraint, " "

he hath ordered your doom which shall

be wrought upon }'uu in the great hall of


the

Ea
the gods
are to

gods weep [and]

lament, he settcth

" to "
"

ward you, and the enemies and those

who
to

be

smitten in the Tuat are condemned

these

standards.'

In the upper register are twelve gods, each

of

whom


184

SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

stands upright, and has the feather of Maiit on his


head, and twelve gods, each of

whom

stands upright,

and has a large


scribed as "

loaf

on his head.

These gods are de-

Maati gods bearing Maat,"


,

^^ <^^

'
'

'

(r?)

^
ig

Vi

S^ p ^
:

and the

"

Heteptiu gods bear-

provlions."
text reads

f^^s^|J.^i<>-^i.
I

The

^111

i -^z^
/^-S^

III

III

J S'

'.Zr

U
111

Jl

JF
I I
I

^^.-^

-B^ ^
III

^^-^

<=> gih
/VVWV\

'^'-^^'^

;7:^;;aa
\ \

j\\

J\

<=>
I I I

=:>

^
III

llM

III <=l^^

(^3)

II

M
I

I 1

II
I I

Jl

AAAAA^

III

-^-^IM^DMlOllllll^llimi
,
.

Cl

<*

n W^^AAA /VvAA^A

|2^^>_Jlllll

c^^

Jll

l^=(^3)i
.ww^^ H .if

X^ll

l_^<=>=0=|
/wwv^
I I
I

i)(.wwvvl

J^

Jl ?===>

C^D _B^

THE REWARD OF THE BLESSED

185

r\m
r^\/\A/\/\ t

Q^^;^TiJ
r=i3)

Ai

SQc^fTk^-P,
r
I

^^
5^

fl

:nisp

^^nmr

IVrfiJIf^^PI
I

^ D

MM

/VV^vV^A
I

Ji^^

^ c^
I I
I

1^ W f
I

W^
A
I I
I I I I

1M^
r\hhl\l^

N\N\N\
rv^/w\

ffi

sS^
1 1 I

^ w
I

%
/VWJV^ /WNAAA

!^.

=0=1111

im4D=o='
I
I

H
/VV^A^A

,vw^S Jr
AAAAAA
H

J^

[IIIJ

" Otl'ering.s of

incense to their gods, libations of cool


douljles,

" "

water to their

and

fillings

of

the

mouth
offer-

by his sustenance afterwards by their

"ings of drink and their otierings of bread.

Come

l86
" forth " "

SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


to

them
to

their gods

and

their doubles.
to

Their
cakes

hands

are

them,

and

they go

their

through the pylon of


unto
:

" saith " to] "

them Your bread


'

and
is

to its gods.

Sar

to you, [according

your utterances, and the peace cakes of Kheper,


of bread.

and loaves
legs,

Ye
shall

shall

have the mastery over

"your

and ye

have satisfaction in your

"hearts, and your gods shall present unto you your


" Mienfit " " " " "

cakes and unto your doubles their provisions,


of bread,

which consist
be of

and their drink, which

shall

tclicser ale,

and their libations

shall be of cool

water, and offerings shall be

made unto them upon


in

earth as the lord[s] of

offerings

Amentet.

For

they have done what was right whilst they were

"

upon

earth,

and they have fought on behalf


shall he called to the
of Life

of their of the

" god,
"

and they

enjoyment

land of the House

with madt.

That which

"is theirs

by right

shall be allotted to

them

in the

"presence of the Great God,


"

Then
ye

shall Osiris say

who doeth away iniquity.' Madt be to you, unto them


:

'

"

Maat

gods,

and peace be unto you by reason


in following after me,
is

of

"

what ye have done


your
life

dwellers

" in

the House, the soul of which

holy.

" live

upon that whereupon those


I

Ye shall who live

" "

there feed, and ye shall have dominion over the cool

waters of your land.

have decreed for you that ye


all

" shall

have your being in

of

it

with madt, and


',shall

" witliout sin (or, defects).'

Their bread

be maat

"cakes, their drink

sliall

be of wine, and

their liljations


THE HARVEST
IN

THE KINGDOM OF

OSIRIS 1S7

"shall be of cool water.

And

there shall be offered

"unto them upon earth the


"

offerings

which must be
twelve men,
(?),

made from

their land."
of

In the lower register are the figures


each of

whom

tends a monster ear of corn


of

or a tree,

under the superintendence


staff,

a god

who

leans on a

and a group
text,

of

reapers, each holding a sickle.


:

The

which

is

nnitilated in places, reads

A/VWV\

AA/WVv^^^^
AAAAAA
I
I

r^

O AAAAAA

111^
AAAA/V\

|^^%^y"
,

c:^::^

Q ^
H h

/v^^^

Y olw 000 o
'

AAAAW

//f AA/WV\ /^N

'

'^'^'^'^

C)

''

(^ M
I

111^

t/vv\^^

qoQ^

ZJ

7;:^^ \=J^

i88

SIXTH DIVISION OF
AA/V^A

THE TUAT

A^AAAA

A/W^A

k^^
.^1
I

J^
AAA/V\A

^'
o
AAV^VN
I 1

qriQ

o
AAAAAA
I I

'"'ill
AAAAAA
I

^^Jl
AAAA^\
I
'

g^^
AW^

QQQ

'yy-y^

"

AAAAAA ^
I

"ill

II

1^ Di

ifilil

^ Wo o

iratjra qyiraqraiiqi^n^jqUJ
A/^WVS
I
I I

A/VV\AA

AA/V^A^

M^
AAAA/V\
1 I

iii
AAAAAA AAAAAA

AWW\
AAAAAA

III

^\

AAAAAA

1^
n1 n1

^n^J^
in connection with the

^
nln
I

"They perform
"grain
(or,

their

work

"grain, and they embrace


Nepiia),

(i.e.,

cultivate) the divine

and the

spirits

feed upon their

"grain in the land of the god of light (Kiiu),


"
" "

who

cometh forth and passeth by them, and [Neb-aut-ab,


"^37

a\
: '

"O", i.e.,

the Lord of iov of heart, saith unto


glorious],

them Let yuur grain be


wheat germinate, and

and

let

your ears

" of

let

your offerings be for Ka.

"

Your hhenfu cakes

are in the Tuat, your offerings are

" to

you, the offerings which are yours by

madt are


THE REAPERS
" " " " " "

OSIRIS 189

IN

THE KINGDOM OF
Herbs
'

decreed

(?)

for

you.

among
of the

you.

Sar

Ea

Let plants spring up in the Fields


'

germinate

and they say unto


Tuat,
of Sar.

and

let

Ea

shine upon the

members

When

thou dost shine the young plants come into being,


great god, thou creator of the Egg.'

Their food

" offerings are of grain, their " their libations are " are

drink

is

of tcheser ale,

and

made with cool water. Offerings made unto them upon earth of the grain from the
Tuat."
it is

" Fields of the

Of the reapers

said

"These are they who have their


" reap the grain in their Field.
"
'

sickles

and who

Ea, saith unto

them

Take ye your

sickles,

and reap ye your

grain, for

it is

" gi-anted

unto you

your habitations, and to

"join yourselves to the Circle of the


"

Hidden
is

of

Forms.

Hail to you,

ye reapers
is

'

Their food
of

of bread-

" cakes,

and

their drink

tcheser ale,

and their

"libations are
"
"

made with cool water. Offerings are made unto them upon earth as being those who reap
the crrain in the Fields of the Tuat."

igo

CHAPTEE

IX.

THE OATE OF AKHA-EN-MAAT.


The Seventh Division of the Tuat. The boat
leads
to of the

Sun having passed through the Sixth


Division.

Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway which

the

Seventh

This

gateway

is

similar to that which guards the Sixth Division,


is

and

guarded by nine gods, who are described as the

"Seventh Company,"
corridor,

iii

at

the

entrance to the

and at

its

exit,

stands a bearded god, witli


SiiEPi,

arms hidden, the former being called


and the
latter Heqes(?),
H
,

and each
Rfi.

is

said

to

extend his arms and liands to

The

"corridor is
is

swept by flames
called

of

fire

as
,

before.

The gateway

Pestit,

(J

(j

and the text

says, " This

"great god cometh to this gateway, and entereth in


"

through

it,

and the gods who are therein acclaim him,"

Eii^^sivmii^ik^^
H


THE SERPENT AKHA-EN-MAAT
.

IQI

Part of the text of the speecli wliich the nine

gods

reads, "
"

make to Ea is broken away, hut what remains Open the secret places, open tlie holy pylons,
portals,"
1
1

and unfold the hidden

\Jf ==xhe

^^ ^^z:^
monster

UTZJ
I I I

^^

nn
T^

^
1 1 1

Z::::^.

^^ ^^^^
===
tail
,

JJ

[ZS31 -nminr

serpent which stands on his

and guards the gate-

way

is

called Akiia-ex-maat, ^_-=>

and the two

lines of text
"

which

refer to his admission of

Ea

read,

He who

is

over this door openeth to Ea.


^
:

" "

Akha-ex-maat

Open thy gate


'

Sa

saith to

to Ea, unfold

thy

doors to Khuti, that he

" thick
"

darkness and

may send light may make his radiance


This door
it,

into the

illumine

the hidden habitation.'

is

shut after the great


is

"

god hath passed through

and there

lamentation
this
is

" to those

who

are in this gateway

when they hear

"door close upon them."


mutilated, but
it

portion of

the text

can be restored with certainty."

In the middle of this Division we see the boat of


being towed on
its

Ea
the

way by

four gods of the

Tuat

god

is

in the
l^y

same form

as before,

and stands

in a shrine

enveloped

at the stern.

Mehen. Sa stands in the bows and Heka The text relating to the god reads
:

ijL:zm^'Amr.s-^\^

Var.,

'f 1IXj Akha-hrA.


torn,
ii.,

See Lelebure, Memoires,

part

ii.,

\A. 11

ff.

ig2

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

^^G |>^;>^!

4^}\\-4&:M'mm

rM^Ziliu ^h*US.'l>M>

VOL.

II.

194

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


A/VVW\

,1

0^11

\i\:zn
AAAAAA K.
1
I

111
A^^vVNA A/VN^/SA
I I I

1^
O
\A Jl
I

iw

Jl

ru

j:i^^^i
j\
III

A^A/W\
I
I

/n
>*c

crzn

^^S^ ^ ^

The Boat

of

Ra being towed through the Seventh Division by the gods thereof.

of the

Tuat

Hiimilt /"^

[3ZD
[

J\

(^^

^y

AAAA/vA
[

-^
"

'^

n'
of the Tiiat

The gods

Thou art towed along, great "god, lord of the hours, who dost work on behalf of " those who are under the earth.' The gods have life
"

they say unto

Ea

tow along

this great god,

and

'

"in

liis

attributes,

and

tlie spirits

"And
" tion

llti

saith unto tlicni:

'There

look upon
is

liis

forms.

magical protecis

to you,

ye

who

tow, and there

holiness to

GODS WHOSE HANDS AND ARMS ARE HIDDEN 195


" "

you,

yc who tow and bring

me

into the nethermost

parts of the Tiiat, tow ye


(?),

me

along until [yc arrive]

"at the chambers


"

and take ye your stand upon the

hidden mountain of the horizon."

of the divine towers of the boat march Twelve bearded gods, the Amenxu-aaiu-kiiekusiiETAU, whose hands and arms are hiddeft; tlioy are
:

In front
1.

described as
hiddenness,'

"

hidden of hands and arms and possessing


iiiiii^ iit

0^
them reads
:

ffl

The

W^Vi
^r^

text relating to

*-^

-*

AAA^v^^

Laaaa^

-<2>-

^3,

-IT

<=> ^
q

^^v^

yj

D
AAAAAA
I I I

jwiv

i~vrn f
I

AAA/v^^
I I
I

^ vyA

L.

^.U"C9.1^^
A^A'V\A
=^

'

D D
7i

^i?.
n

czsm

-=??^LnJ

\>

If

196

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

ill

dZD

/WVVNA

'

^^
IZTZl
(or,

=Z
"

These are they who possess the hiddeiiness

who

"hold the mystery) of this great god.


"

A^erily those

"
"

who are in the Tuat see him, and the dead who burn in Het-Benben (or, the temple of
they come forth to the place where

see him,

Ka), and

" god.
"

Ra

saith unto

them

is

the body of this

'

Eeceive ye
(or,

my

forms,

and emln'ace ye your hidden forms

mysteries).

"
'

Ye
is.

shall be in

Het-Benben, the place where


is

my

body

The hiddenness which


:

in

you

is

the hiddenness

' of
" " " "

the Tuat, and cover ye your arms therewith.'

they say unto Efi


the head of
tlie

And

'

Let thy soul be in

lieaA'en, at

liorizon, let

thy shadow penetrate


;

the hidden place, and let thy body be to the earth


as for the

upper regions
Fulfil

of

the sky
thyself,

we

ascribe

Ra

"thereto
"

tliou

and take thou


Tlioir food

thy place [with] thy l)ody in the Tuat.'

"consistetli of Dli'cvings of every kind wlierel)y souls

"l)ecome coutciil, and oflbrings are made unto them


_"

uion earth liy reason of the siglit of the light in the

"

Tuat."
2.

Eight bearded gods, the Neteuu-heti, who stand

GODS WHOSE HANDS AND ARMS ARE HIDDEN ig/

c^ ^ ni- tf^ 2=s ,^ ^^ ^' ?^ ."*^ ^^ " ,_, ^^ ,^ CTT J^


"lii-J

Sn T^ ^'" 4>^ ^- .d^


n

.^:=

=s=

A-K

-9 =^s^

ic=i^fl

-^ c^

fefl^

i=a K=s

asas

I I I
'

Tlie

Twelve Gods whose bauds and arms are hiddeu.


198

<

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


by
their sides,

upright, with their hands hanging

and
| |

are

described

as

"

the gods

of

the

temples,"

and eight gods, the Sennu, who stand

npright,

with their arms held straight together in

front of them, at a little distance from their bodies.

The text which


)^3M a/vw

refers to

them reads

tK "
21
!<

n i

UJ

A/WW\ NsN\N\
-Q
-

no
ri
A/VAAAA
M

J J 3 ^

==*'^

^ J
J\
III

\\2J\
A/WVAA
\r-j\/\N\

AAAAW
1 1 1

\
'=^

\\

^^
Jl
I I 1

^ W

ill

AW^

]^-Z

11
AAAAAA AAAftAA
III
I
I

AAAA/^

A^A^AA

III

slmlJi:"^

mm

FM

iTi ^

/WWVA

THE NETERU-HETI AND THE SENNU GODS IQQ

='f>^'yi;"HAT. ^

A' +
Q

The Eight

Neteru-heti.

Four

of the Seniiu Gods,


200

"

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

2^2
T

%
Ji
I I

Tl
"

_B^ 2^^=^ L/wwvx s=i'^z^t^^ a..


I

1\

^ r^ ^^
iy
i<^
I

^^5

rri

^\ jf
i
I

111

ill

Q-

M
1

/wwv\ ^^-^
I I I

Qq (J
111 II

AAA/V\A
1

*^

rArys/V\

AAAAAA

IJ

"These are they who are outside Het-Benben, and


they see

Ra with

their eyes,
;

and they enter into


that which
it.

his
is

" secret (or,

hidden) images

is

theirs

" apportioned,
" saith

and the Sennu gods bring


:

unto them

My
'

[And Ra]
is

offerings (or, provisions) are

" "
"

from your

offerings,

and
is

my

nourishment
ye

from
are in

your nourishment w^hich

to you,

who

my

secret phices.

I protect

my

secret things
!

which

" are in "


"

Het-Benben.

Hail to you

Your

souls live,

saith unto them


:

and their

offerings are the offerings of KiiUTi.'


'

Tuati

ye gods who dwell in the Tuat,


[places]
is

"

who

are in the divine


to

of

the governor of
is

"Ament,
" their " " " "

whom what
who
lie

their

due

given upon

ground,

down upon

their

own

lands,

your own

flesh is to you,

ye have gathered together

your bones, ye have knit together your members, and


ye have collected your
sweet winds to your
flesh.

There

are,

moreover,

nostrils,

ye have girded on your


wigs.'

" apparel,

and ye have put on your


:

In the upper register are


1.

Twelve gods, the Kheru-metau[h], each


;

of

whom

holds a stake or weapon, forked at one end


described as " those

they are

who hold

the

metau weapons,"


THE KHERU-METAUH GODS
1i

201
-^^'"""s
'"

^
I
I

k ^^
:
I

ill-

'^'^^
.

**"'

tliese

reads

'/w!w!

M^D

_ffi^

Ji X
iiiii'l

<^=

rri

:m rn s '^ 4^ rn
I I

^WWN

^
^

<==>

Ji

'^.^w.

_^ JT C^^ JT

^m^^q^l^ ^
fl

J\

_B^ D

^
D D

(|()

W- ^^l'^
t

^ I ;^
[j
I I

kai

4-\\\

Ji

<:3>

wwv\

,^ww^
fi^
I

^111
"

(^3)
fv
y
>

X
I

c.
<r\

Ill

M
ra

_B^

<z:>
A

^
III

I I I

AAAwv
I I

lA

^CS^ S Jr

31

_B^

M^

"Ea
" " [go

saith unto

them:

'Eeceive

ye your metauh Hail to you,


;

weapons, and take ye them with you.


against] the serpent fiend
in

Mamu

hail to you,

"

make ye gashes

him when

the heads appear from

202
" "
"

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

out of him, and turn ye

unto

Ra

him backwards.'
in our

They say
for

'

Our metanh weapons

hands are

Ea

[and against]

" the great


" " " "

Mamu, and we will make Ra, do away and e^'il WoKM.


forth

gashes in
tlie

heads
of

when they come


serpent Kheti.'

from the windings

the

These are the gods who are in the


in the sky,

[Boat of

Rji],

and they repulse Ai)ep


It

and

they travel through the Tuat.

is

their duty to

'*

'*

*.'*.'

'

'.

..

,'..

*..'>

.^

'

'

i
'i

1~ Jssj <^ J^ c-a a ^5 ,1 Tx


I

^d=? .__a

\ 'tii T^A liM *-H

jJL> \ ^ ^^ 4i2^
g^yjsy.

H^H

Jl^

^^^^' I

^^i*T".

::^^

'

ifl^

The Kberu-Metauli Gods.

"

turn Ijack

Apep on
the Tuat.

Ijelialf

of

Ra

in

Amentet and the


to

" j)laces of
" tlieir "

And

this

god allotteth
is

them
and

provisions of bread, and their beer

the tchesert
water,

drink,

and

their

libations
to
of

are

of

cool

" offerings are " repulse the


2.

made

them upon earth because they

Enemy

Ra

in Amentet."

The gods KiiEiiU-AMU-rEREiiu-TEru-EM-QEBU-F, and


is

the monster serpent Seba-Apep, the body of which

held

THE GODS OF STAKES

203

a..

_^ AWWVVA K5 ^

'

>

The Khcru-Metauh Gods.

up above

tlie

ground by twelve bearded gods, who are

described as " those

who have food when

the heads appear

III.

Tw-elve

human heads grow

out from his body,

i;;ai:^>)i^a^attit>iM

T"

AA.VV^VV\

-*

'

III

/j

rr;

^^

""^

'

'

'

osrra

..=

l^'i-

-^

The Kheru-Metauh Gods.


204
the
first

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


appearing from
liis

head, aud

tlie

other eleven
:

from his hack.

The

text whicli rehites to

them reads

^\
O
o

A^w^^

A;VWW

AAAA^^

\\\m^

ji

S^^
A/VS/W\
I I

j\
I I I

J(||iiii;

L)

^
1

w.
AAAAAA

^^

c^^
AAAAAA

III

zi

J\
I I I

A/V\A/V\

[^^

flm^i
\\

^J?
AAAAAA
I

'^

A A

l_HiJ^l

Mill
ra ra

fZI^^I^^^
^
"These are they who are the adversaries
" two-fold evil, "
"

of
of

his

and who overthrow the enemies

Ea,

and

it is

their

duty to seize the SEBA-Fiend when he


to

maketh heads

come

forth from him.

[Ra] saith to


THE SERPENT SEBA-APEP
"them:
"

205
to

'Turn
'

yc back Seba,

make ye

go liack-

wards Apep wlieii the heads appear from out of him, [Ea] ordereth for him his "and let him perish.'
" destruction.

heads, ye shall he eaten, ye shall

Ije

ye shall he consumed, when ye come forth from "him.' Ea ordereth for them when they come forth
" eaten,
"

that they shall be

consumed

(or,

swallowed up)

[in]

" their folds

when he journeyeth

to them,
folds.

and that the

"heads shall retreat within their


"

The WoPvM
l)e

Hefau shall be without eyes, and he shall


upon
his roarings,

without

"his nose, and he shall be without his ears, and he


" shall exist " that

and he

shall live

upon

which he himself

iittereth.

The food

[of these

"gods] consisteth of the offerings [which are made to


"

them] upon earth."


3.

An
.

upright, bearded

mummied form

called

Qan,

a -jj

To the neck

of this figure are attached

two

ropes,

which are twisted together synnuetrically, and

are grasped

by twelve bearded men with both hands. Each god stands within a loop formed by the two ropes,
and has a star before him.
"

The gods

are described as
"

those

who hold

the rope which cometh forth


the

^ \>\^'Z:Z^(^^iti. More
are the words
(]

figure

zl

(2

The

text reads

1^

mm

206

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

ft

"r

11

zr^

/wwn

^^

Ok^^i^LM^S^S
,/^
Ili

7i

AV<A^O

111

Tlio .Serpent 8el)ii-A|H'|i, uiili the iwclvc liuninn hciuls wliicli boily uikI his twelve iilloii(liiiit yoiia.

i;i(i\v

out of

liia

THE SERPENT SEBA-APEP

207

r~TTn

-A_

'i

4ii'&

O n \tjW
JL

"'^^

yV>*VWM

nAMM A^

rr.

^. ?^ o^ ^A^

The Serpent

Seba-Aiiep, wiili the twelve liuiiHiii lieiiUs which Ixxlj- and his twelve atteuilant gods.

grow out

of his

208

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


.

..

fl

III"

^
n
<i:HI
*^^

II

c.

A\

\\

11

c=^

_il

ra

ir\

fi\

-(^

r>

AAAAAA

o
iU

r\

-(^

.Zl^V^

,WyW\ _Zi

II

_/i

/VVWV\

ft'^

?S

/T^k

<=

'"=^

tV

555CJK;

i**^*'

=
"^

==^

^8?^

f= -g-

,8.

^ 1

Tlie

god Qeua, aud the gods who hold the

roi)e.

/WWNA
I I
I

V^

'=^
I

^
tho 'Puat.

AAAAAA

1^

/vvwv\ A/WVNA
I

H
coincth
I'orth
IVoiii

"The Enemy
" Offerings shall
" I exist

of

lifi

be

made unto
trees.

the gods of that whereby

under the

Seize ye the rope, and tic ye

QENA AND THE GODS WHO HOLD THE ROPE 20g

cj-a
fv

_A ^JB

cw>a
/!==.

M ^

.s. -^*

^^ '=^ a =^

^^
1.=:=^

',^

ss:!3

The gods w ho hold the rope.


"

therewith

the

mouth
is

of

Aqen.

Your hours come


tlierein.

"forth, and there


"

benefit to

you

Eest ye

upon your throne[s], and

let the

rope enter into the


to the pLace

"

mouth

of the

god

A(,>en

when he eometh

..-

*
-

: .

^^ -Xi

i|-J

H-^

-fe*

Tsa

c=^ ?=^ ^^
^ rr-^

fc^ o

*^ a

The

ijuds

who

hold

tlie

rope.

VOL. n.


210
"

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


;

where the hours are born

Kfi

crieth

out,

and

it

" resteth in its place, "

They say unto Ea


with
light.

The
'

and

it

maketh an end
god

of Anecj.

Naq

is

tied

up with
Ea,
'

"the rope, the hours


" " "
"

of the gods(?) are to thee,

Eest thou and thy hidden body

Their provisions of loaves of bread are to them, their


beer
is tchesert,

and

their libations are of cool water,


to

and

offerings are

made
1.

them upon

earth."
:

In the lower register are

TV-

h/WVH

AMV/A

god,

standing,
staff; his

and
is

leaning

upon a long

name

Tuati,

^ w
2.

The serpent Neiiep,


^

long body of whicli

is

ran' made to serve

tlie

as biers for twelve gods in

mummied
provided
lions,

form
The god
Tuati,

the serpent's body

is

with twenty-four legs of


a
of

and

mummied god

rests over each pair


"

them.

These gods are described as

those

who

are in the body of Osiris asleep," I

"^^^^
M

"v^

and "those who are in

inactivity,"

3.

Four gods, each with

his

arms

stretclied straight

together before him at an acute angle with his body.

The legend

reads, IcJiatit-ta-rut

'

^f\

^^

THE TWELVE SLEEPING GODS

211

AV^

ii-=*=*
;

j.}^4..ifrA

<ri:>.^CM<!sa,i^CkaAtViUUiMk^^:.A^<i{ttiUuaAciMAAAA^^^&.\.-i^

..

Ji.vj-.' .

'

' ' .i, . ' ..'. .-

'. ^.'. -J .J.-

.-['
'

.: .-V''

TTT^^^'"^''^^^?^?'^^?^*?!'

^. =#, -^ ^^

^ ^ 4^ W-*
'^s

v'

^^

The gods who are

asleep iu the

body of

Osiris,

>>A^

-^
.'
,

^?fe<

A,vsjjv, ,,vyiv

X^

-^

II

^*V^

Avww\

j)e^ji ^XSivV^

RB -J^ J^

*VVVWJ

TtC^

B~^ ^hJ i^ SL

^P

^T*

/^^

,1
*

III

fr.ll 1^
kill

X\

J.

S==? ^^ ff^ r^H ^"' i^ ^^ L^


?>f^'

^^r

l,^

i*iv>^

iii

-F A,n

=^

^
1^

Wf,

'

.'

l^

4B>

^i

The gods who are asleep

in the

body

of Osiris.

l^c^ j" 8>.

^:p,

V,\

A ^-

n^

^C- TTT

M r^ ^ ^^ ^~^, ^
S^

^-

I.T.

*^

Four Khast-ta-rut Gods.

Xwv\^

\^'\=l))^

i.

...

'

A jrod in mummied form.

The serpent

in the

round

Four Khast-ta-rut Gods.

ijool of fire.


214
4.
5. 6.

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


Four gods.

A A

serpent within a circle

filled

with water.

god in

mummied

form.
:

The

text relating to these reads

"Fill
III
I I

^
I

s=>
/^>^AA^
g

Q.

Ill

/I AV\AAA

n V

Zl

>

fl

AAAAA^

MM'
i^
(i.

/V^AAAA

m^^

S
Q

iiirriV.:F
I
I

T^%K
^
I

AA/\AAA
I

AA^NAAA
I

^ly

O^

II

^
\

A/VNAAA
I I

AAAAAA

II

AAAAAA

Ci

W;\

AAAA/V\

fi

AAAAAA
I I

D
I

^
AAAAAA
I I I

\>
A/VWV\
I

1 I
I

AAAAAA

'-"""'I I

AAAAAA
I
I I

V
D

A/VAW\ AAAAAA

AAA/VV\ AAAAAA

c^

^i^

AAAAA^ AA^WNA

AAAAAA
I

fVWW\

AAAAAA

ra D

t^^:i:"iv^i

THE TWELVE SLEEPING GODS,


r^

ETC.

215

MM

^
1 I

111

llCil^f
I

?
"

n
iEZ

^
I

/VWVV\ /f' ">v

W^
^)

III

^ III

A^

III

_M^

O
8

^
^
\>

AAAAAA A/WVV\

? lU
AAAAAA AAA/
I I

*1
I

S.
AAAAAA

AAAAAA

."1

'

'

AA^VSAA AAAAAA A/V\AAA

/WVW\ AAAAAA

^ O
I

oQ,$ra
^
*->

^1111

'

s
(UK AAAAAA

A/VWV\

_m^

AAAAAA

'N

Zl

Pi

AAA/^A^
I

AAAA^\A

^ o

ra
AAAAAA
I

^ o
A/VVW\ AAAAAA
,

*1
"^

o,
-1

,C3J;p 7

AAAAAA

1^

AA/W\A

1^

f\

A^yw^^

r]

2T6

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

a^iznjM
-ra^^-^M
ffl

<=>

2:5=5
I

ra

n^
1

^ O

fifl^$?kniii^
(E3) /^ ^
I I I

v^

AAAA/

/^A^v^AA

AA/^/v^A
'

Msrj\l\j\

W
/-\
I

<i

s
A/vw^^
I
I

AA/W^V\

^ /WVW\
^w^NAA

'

'

AA^AA^
I
I

^:^

LI
If

A^^>A^^

AW/V\A

A/V\AAA

rcD
(-]

<Ci^
I

-H-

/W\AAA
1 I I

/w^vvA

pi

AW\A^

rt3

III
/^^AA\^

7i

III
.y^
O

1'k^
I

mA/WVV\
I I I

/VV^AA^

AV\/vV\
Q.

^*

*>,
I
I 1

AA/WV\
1 I

\\\

hH

i^^^i
^

n
_, ;/V

nil

-^^

i-M5t(^3)iA

A^WWS
I I

M-

i\)
[

/VVWVv AAAAAA

III

VVWV\
/VVWNA
fW\r\AA

^
A^AAAA
I
I I

Sf
_
1
/I

^.^M
"^
r~\

0' <^,N

^
:

AAAAAA

" Tliu g(jd

Tuati saith unto thcni

Hail,
'

ye gods

THE SERPENT NEHEP,


"

ETC.

217

who

are over the Tuat, yc gods

" [place] "

of the governor of Anient,

manently on your
lift

places,

who dwell in this who abide perand who lie down upon
your bodies, and
gird

"your couches,
"gather
" " " " "
"

up the
your

flesh of

together

bones,

and
your

up

your
flesh

members, and bring ye into one place your


There
is

sweet
oil"

(or, fresh) air for

nostrils.

Loose

and take

your funeral swathings, untie and remove

your wigs, unclose your eyes and look ye at the light therewith, rise ye up from out of your inert and
helpless state,

and take possession yourselves


(i.e..

of

your

" fields in
" ings).

Sekhet-nebt-hetepu
fields for

Field, lord of offerthis Field,

There are

you in

and the

"waters thereof are for you.


" there, [and] fields

Let your offering be


Their libations

from Nebt-hetepu.'
It
is

"shall
"

be of water.

the serpent

Nehep who

giveth their bodies [and] their souls, and they journey

"on
"
" "

"libations,

Sekhet-Aaru to have dominion over their and to walk over the earth. They count up their flesh, their food is of bread-cakes, and their drink is of tchesert ale, and their libations Offerings are made unto them upon are of water.
to

"earth as [unto] the god Sah, who resteth upon his


"

ground."

"These are they whu arc


"

in the circuit uf tliis pnol.

There

is

a serpent living in this pool, and the water


is of
fire,

" of

the pool

and the gods


of

of the e^rth

and
This

" the

souls of the earth cannot descend thereto by


fire

"reason of the flames of

this serpent.

2l8

SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


who
is

'great god
'

the governor of the

Tuat

liveth

in the water of this pool."

And Ea
'
'

saith unto

them

"

Hail to you,

ye gods

who guard
that
is

this holy pool, give

ye yourselves to him

the Governor of Aukert.

The water

of this

'

pool

is Osiris,

and

this

water

is

Khenti-Tuat.
of this pool

This

'

flame consumeth and destroyeth the souls which dare


to

'

approach

Osiris,

and the awe

cannot

'

be done away, or
for the gods

'

made an end of, or overcome. As who keep ward over its waters, their
and their drink
unto Teri
fields
is

'

food

is

bread,

tchesert

ale,

and

'

their libations are of water.

Offerings are
in

made unto
of
this

'

them upon earth


offerings.

as

Amentet, lord
in

'

There are

for

you

Field,
offer-

'

and the waters thereof are


ings
Ije

for you.

Let your

'

there [and] fields from Nebt-lietepu.


It
is

Their

'

libations shall be of water.

the serpent

Nehep

'who giveth
'

their bodies [and] their souls,

and they

'journey into
their

Sekhet-Aaku
and
to

to

have dominion over


earth.

libations,

walk on the
is of

They
and

'

count up their limbs, their food


their drink
of water.
is

liread-cakes,

'

of tchesert ale,

and their libations are


earth
his ground.

'

Offerings are

made unto them upon


upon

'

as unto Saii,
"

who

resteth

These are they who are


is

in the circuit of this pool.


"

'

There

a serpent living

219

CHAPTER

X.

THE GATE OF SET-HRA.


The Eighth Division of the Tuat.
Having passed through the Seventh Division of the Tuat, the boat of the Sun arrives at the gateway called
Bekhkhi,
Division,

JJ
or, as

[](|

leads to the Eighth f^ liriD, which


:

the opening text reads

<rp>

1]

"I

<::;;:>

c^

^
"^
I '

/wvw\
[j

-A

_cr^

'^

-^
,

av/^^a avv^v\

/vvwvi

^'^^

n^
O

111

-fliU

t\ J^

v\
Jl

"^^^^
I

"

This

great

god
it,

I'

"cometh
"

forth to this gate,

and entereth through

and the gods who are therein acclaim this great god." The gateway is like that through which the god passed
into the previous Division,

and

its

outwork

is

guarded

by

nine gods in the

form

of

mummies, who

are described

as the

Paut,

i.e.,

the

company
tlie

of the nnie gods,

R ^

III iii

'=>.

At

the entrance to

gate proper stands a bearded,

mummied

form, with his hands folded on his l)reast,


'^'''^
,

and at

its

exit stands a similar

form called Heptti,

'^

^^;

each of these

is

said

220
to "

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


extend his arms and hands to Ka,"
a;^^_
ft
I

'^^s

.-

The corridor

is

swept by flames
of

of fire,

which proceed from the mouths

two

uraei, as before.

The company
address
" art "
Efi,

of

the gods
say, "
of

and

who guard the outwork thou who Come thou to us,


thou great god
for thyself the holy

at the

head

the horizon,
places,

who openest hidden

open

" pylons,

and unfold the doors thereof,"

-^^

-^-^
^^^zz:^
i

The
stands on his
*
,

monster

serpent,

which

tail

and guards the door, is called Set-hra,


lines of text

and the two

which refer
is

to his

admission of

Ka

read, "

He who

over

this

door

"openeth
"

to Ea.

Sa

saith unto Set-hra:

Open

thy

"gate to Ka, unfold thy portal to Khuti, so that he

may

illumine the thick darkness, and

may

send light

" into the


" " "

hidden abode.

This gate closeth after the


it,

great god hath passed through


are on the other side of
it

and the souls who


the

wail

when they hear


^

door closing \\\nm them,"

^^ V

*"

i)

^S

cnj

"^

"^

1 Tnmir

'^jil

The gate

of the

Serpent Set-hra.

222

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


D
ra

?)

z4

-A

1
I

Leg
we

A^(Vv^^
iiiiiiiii

111

the middle of the Division


its

see tlie boat of

Ea

being towed on
;

way by
is

four gods of the Tuat,

the god

in the

same form

as before,
his

and Sa stands on the look-out, and Heka obeys


instructions as to the steering.

At

the head of the

The Bout

of

Ra being towed through the Eighth Division by the gods thereof.

IffliM
of the

Tuat

four gods

who tow

the boat stands an aged god,

who

leans on a long
in Nu," -

staff',

and

is

called "

He who

dwelleth
of

DOO
is

Immediately in front

the

divine procession

a long tank, wherein


four beings,

groups, each containing

we see four who are repre-

sented in the act of performing various evolutions in


the water.

These are called Herpiu,

^
,
I

(](]

yN

i,

Akiu,

(j

(j ()

NuBiu,

r^ J

(]

()

and Kiiepau,


THE GODS OF THE WATERS
r->

223
translated

Kw

v^

wliicli

names

may

1)e

"

Bathers, Floaters, Swininiers, and Divers."


refers to this section reads
:

The text
"""**

which

AAAAAA

(p

T1^^.2^V1Ji^\ifl
"1
s
.
,

v^

C\

^o B
rrV^

t]

^1^!

^
^

*-*

'A^^za

U AVVA"A

T7

ms^A
AAA/V\A
I I

s
rti

o<^ os:

>k

-^
I

<?

:r^
(^

AA/VW\ A(WVV\
1
I I

A/WVW

i^1=1i^i^1VTi^^i^i
AAAAAA /WvVvA

III

Jfl^^lfli^.v^l O 11

->

^ W
I

J\

rm
I

III

o
11

o
I I

fv

<

^i;
/WW\A
I
I I

1
(5

^irnlV
fVWJV,

n c /

<ZI>

A/VWV\


224

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

ffi(J0!D?^D2^
/WWVS
I
I

P^

m
ft

AAA^AA T^

^!\\^
1
I

/SA/VNAA
]

o
I I
I I

^
I I I

@
I

AA^^/^A

<;b^

^^

AAAWVV
I
I I

f^\
(2

ww\
I
I I I I I

<

c-\

s
^J

S
I

?
s^
I

^ D
I

2^^^

X
;

^ w
5j=^

111

Jy

i^il ^

III

!^0l

AA/W\A
A/WVAA

AWVV\
A/WV\A
'^
A/V^A/V\

'^'^^^
I 1

A/WW\
A^W^A^

Mis:
:

D
section of this text reads
is

The

first

This great god

towed along by gods


say, "

of the Tuat,

and behold, those wlio tow Ea along


"praise in heaven to
"praise on earth to
" "
tlie

Let there be
let there

soul of Efi,

and

be

liis l>o(ly, ftir

heaven
is

by means

of his soul,

and earth
Hail
!

is made young made young by

means

of

his

body.

We

open for

tliee

the

"

hidden place, and we make straight for thee the roads


Akert.
I'e

" of

thou at peace,

Efi, witli

thy hidden
things

"things,
" in

thou who art praised [by]


(or, attri[)utes).

tliy secret
!

thy forms

Hail

We

tow thee


THE GODS OF THE WATERS
*'

225

along,

Ea, we guide thee,

thou who art at the

"

head of heaven, and thou comest forth to those who

" arc
**

immersed

in the waters,

and thou

slialt

make thy

way

over them."
refers to the

The passage which

aged god reads

"He
" " "

(literally, those)

who

is

in

Nu

saith to those

who are immersed in the swimming in the pools of


journeyeth in his boat,
>^>

water, and to those

water,

'

Look ye
Great

at Rii,

who are who

[for

he
I .vv^^

is]

of

Mystery,
"
Awyvv>

<**"*

^an **"^

'

il

XI

<"S>

2-

* rl III

/HVWA

The Four Herpiu Gods, and the Four

Akiix Gods.

" It is

he who ordereth the destinies

(or, affairs) of

the

" gods, it is
" of the

he who perf ormeth


(i.e.,

(or,

maketh) the plans


!

Khu

the

spirits).

Hail

Eise up,

ye

" beings of time,


" ordereth

pay ye heed
"
:

to Ea, for it is

he wlio

your
of

destinies.'

The speech
"

Ea

reads

Put

fortli

your heads,

ye who are immersed in ye who arc under ye who swim,


let

" tlie water, thrust

out your arms,

" the waters, stretch out


" there

your

legs,

be breath to your
VOL. n.

nostrils,

ye who are deep Q


226
"ill

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


the waters.

Ye

shall

have dominion over your


of

" waters,

ye shall be at peace in your tanks

cool

" waters,
" shall
" "

ye shall pass through the waters of Nu, and ye


a

make

way through your

cisterns.

Your

souls

are upon earth, and they shall be satisfied with their

means

of subsistence,

and they shall not

suffer destruc-

" tion.
" earth,

Their food shall consist of the offerings of the

and meat and drink

shall be given unto

them

"

upon

earth,

even as to him that hath obtained dominion

A
I

'ij^rr.i^-^i

The Four Nubiu Gods, and the Four Khcpau Gods.


" "

over his offerings upon earth, and whose soul

is

not

upon the
their

earth.

Their food shall consist of bread,


tche.sert

"and
<'

drink shall be
Ije full

wine, and

their

cisterns shall

of cool water,

and there

shall be

" offered "

unto them upon

eartli of tliat whicli tliis

lake

produceth."

In the upper register arc the following


1.

Twelve ])earded gods, who stand with


tlioh- sides,

their
tlie

arms

lianging by

and are described as

"divine

"sovereign chiefs

who

give the bread wliich hatli been

THE TCHATCIIAU AND THE SOULS OF SERSER 227


" allotted "

and green herbs


Serser
(i.e.,

to the souls
fire),"

who
I

are in the

Lake

of

blazing

^
CF=0

v_-^

^f .^'iS

The Tchalchau -who give

tlie

bread of Maat,

Souls

who

are in the

Lake

of Serser.

2.

Nine bearded, human-headed and human-handed


before each

hawks, which stand with their hands raised in adoration


;

is

a loaf of bread,

and a few


228

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


These are described as the "souls
of Serser,"

green herbs, '^.


"

who
3S
o.

are in the

Lake

J^

god,

who

holds a sceptre in his right hand, and

in his left.

The
AN^AW

texts
H-

which relate
'19-

to these read

'^
III
I

s
...
I

AAAAAA

[-AWW\-|^^
I I

f3

Ci

^AAAA
I I

^,^A&

A^V^

0-^=^e^l^-^|^tr^
=L' AAA/W\
'

\IT
111 1
I I

^AAAA^

nn

A^WWA
'
'

5:5
/w\^A^

<

-*

V
"
' '

-t

c:^

HI
^'^
1\J

A^^AAA

'

33:

AWVV\

_S^

111

II
ra

-M^t

(^
r\

V=^
I

X ^

III

AAAWA

^
A'^W^A
I
I

A^yvAAA
I I

S
A^AAA^
I
I

^-^^.
I

^.iij

II

/W\AAA


THE SOULS OF SERSER
/\/\/v\/\/\
I

22g

D
I

?
1

s
1 I

AAAAA/\ "^
I

I I I

AA/V^AA

1
I I

m
f]
'^cz:::^

AA/W\A
AA/Y^AA
1

,\Af\/V\f\

/VW^A

^
AA/VNAA
'

'^'^

AA/VSAA

(^^

L
I

Ji

m
'

_[

111

Mils
A/WAAA

^ W
O

^"

^^^

H
*^
<
I

AA(VvV\

^
1 1

lO

ra
I

?:i
AAA/W\
f-AfVW^

^
I I
I

w
I

"TTH

o
I I

t^

/WW\A

Jo
ill

U'^

W^^A\ AW^A^

I^
^
The
" " "

A/\A/W\
I

AAA/^^

AA/W^^
AAAAAA

rm
:

r AAAAA

porti(jn of the text

which

refers to tlie twelve

sovereign chiefs reads

These are they who make souls

to

have a right to

the green herljs in the Lake of

unto them

Serser.

Ea

saith

'

[Hail, ye] divine sovereign princes of

" the gods,

and ye

chiefs of the

Lake

of Serser,
let

who

"place souls over their green herbs,

them have

230
" "

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


;

dominion themselves over their bread


bread which
is

give ye your

appointed, and bring ye your green

"

herbs to the souls


the Lake of

" in
"
'

who have been ordered to They say unto Ea Serser.'


:

The
'

exist

bread appointed hath been and the green herbs have

been brought to the divine souls

whom

thou hast
!

"
" "
"

ordered to exist in the Lake of Serser.


the

Hail

Verily,
thee,

way
is

is

fair

for

Khenti-Amenti praiseth
thee.'

and those who dwell in Ta-thenen praise


food
of bread-cakes,

Their

and

their beer

is

the tcliesert

" beer,

and

their

libations

are

of

cool

water

and

" offerings
"

are

who

are with (?)

made unto them upon earth by those Tui by the divine sovereign princes."
refers to the souls in the

The passage which


Serser reads
:

Lake

of

of

"These are they who are in the Land


"
"

Serser;

they have received their


the mastery over
god.
her])R,
;

l)read,

and they have gained

this

Lake, and they praise this

"great

Ea,

saith

unto them:

'Eat

ye your

"green
"

and

satisfy

ye yourselves with your

cakes

let there

be fulness to your bellies, and satis-

" faction

to

your hearts.
of

Your green herbs

arc

of
1)0

"the Lake
"

Serser,

the

Lake which may not


of

"approached.
the

Praise ye me, glorify ye me, for I the Tuat.'

am

Great One of terror

"

unto

Ea Kail
: '

They say
and majesty

to thee,
!

thou Great One of the


Praise
is

" SEKiiitviu (i.e.,

Powers)
is

thine,
[is

"is
"

tliiiio.
;

The Tuat
it
is

tliino,

and

subservient] to

thy will

a hidden place [made] by thee for


THE BURNT ENEMIES OF
" those
" is

OSIRIS
of
;

231

who

are in

its Circles.

The height

Heaven
it
is

thine,

and

[is

suhservient] to thy will

"secret place [made] by thee for those


" thereto.

who belong
(or,

The Earth
for

is

for

thy dead Body, and the


be

"
"

Sky

is

thy Soul.

Ra, be thou at peace

content) with that which thou hast


being.'

made

to

come

"into
" their

Their food consisteth of

bread-cakes,

green herbs are the plants of the spring, and

" the

waters wherein they refresh themselves are cool*



1
1
1

Souls

who

are in the

Lake

of Serser.

god with a sceptre.

" Offerings " [being]

are

made unto them upon


:

the earth

as

the product of this liake of Serser."

In the lower register are


1.

Horus

[the Aged], in the


staff.

furm

of a

bearded man,

leaning upon a
2.

Twelve bearded beings, who are described as the


of
Osiris,"
first

"burnt enemies
(ifl)

4-\00 j3 J^
have their arms tied

\^\\

The

four


232

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

behind their back in such a way that the right hand


projects at the left side,

and the

left

hand

at the right

The second four have their hands tied together side. at the ell)Ows, and the upper parts of the arms are at The third four have right angles to their shoulders.
their

arms

tied together at the elbows,

and their elbows


undu-

are on a lower level than their shoulders.


3.

monster speckled serpent, which

lies in

lations immediately in front of the enemies of Osiris,

;ct

Horus the

Aj-ed.

The Burnt Enemies

of Osiris.

and belches

fire

into the face of their leader

the

name

of this serpent is

Kheti,

In each undulation
form,

stands a bearded god in


hieroglyphics

mummied
describe

and
as
"

the
the

written alcove

them

gods

who

are above Kiieti,"


]
:

1^

\\

The
tJ\/W^

text reads

^=S^
f\/\f\fJV\

-5^

THE ENEMIES OF
Ji U^e ^1

OSIRIS

233

^
i
I

1(2
I

111-

fl

II

II

MM

1^^

AAA^^A^

ANA/W\

^^

iK

_^iii III

^
I

1111 x^^>^

|;^| llXiJ
I

^5 ^mi

1^-^

^ e

III

(]J^
Q

AA/VS/V\

iiiiiiiii

iimnr

_^

2^.=:^

/wv^

fl

^z:^

C3a

i;.^

<=^ ^ _^^^

^^

nn.tv'i

=n?

fifi-aiii^inJmy

234

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

:^:i^

X
"

[This

scene representetli]
cloeth

"
"
"

what Horns
father Osiris.

for

his

The enemies

who

are in this scene have


calamities ordered for

" their " "

them hy Horns, who


nnto

them Let
: '

saith
l)e

there

" fetters
" "
.fT.j-.fUlJ^

on
of

yonr

arms,
father,

O
let

enemies

my
ye

yonr arms be tied np towards yonr heads,

" " "

who have

no [power], ye shall be fettered


[with yonr arms] behind you,

"

ye who are hostile to Rfu

nmww S

"

Ye

shall

l)e

hacked in

pieces,

"

THE SERPENT KHETI


"ye
"
"
sliall

235

nevermore have your heing, your souls shall


[of

be destroyed, and none

you] shall live ]>ecause of


father Osiris
;

what ye have done


[his]

to

my
[of

ye have

"put

mysteries behind your backs, and ye have


the god] from the secret
is

"dragged out the statue


" place.

"you, and
"

The word of my word

my
is

father Osiris

madt against
ye who

maot against you,

have desecrated

(literally, laid bare)

the hidden things

"

which concern the

rest (or, resting-place) of the

Great

" "

One who begot me in the Tuat. exist, ye shall come to an end.'


"

ye shall cease to

Horus

saith

'

[0]

my

serpent Kiiet, thou Mighty


forth
this

" Fire,

from whose mouth cometh


is

flame

" "
"

which

in

my

Eye, whose undulations are guarded

by [my] children, open thy mouth, distend thy jaws,


and belch forth thy
by the
fires

against the enemies of

my

" father,

burn thou up their bodies, consume their


fire

"souls

which issueth from thy mouth,


are
in

"and by the flames which


"

thy body.

My

divine

children
spirits,

are

against

them,

they

destroy

" [their]

and those who have come forth from


them, and they shall never more

"me

are

against

" exist. " forth,


"

The
and

fire

which

is

in this serpent shall

come

shall blaze against these enemies


it

whenso-

ever Horus decreeth that

shall do

so.'

Whosoever

"

knoweth how

to

use words of power [against] this

" serpent shall " fiery path,"

be as one

who doth not

enter upon his

The end

of this text

on the sarcophagus

of Seti

I. is

236

EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


from the tomb
:

defective, but

that
" to

it

should end thus

of

Eameses VI. we
shall be

see

" Offerings

made
Their

these gods
is of

who

are

upon

this great serpent.


is of

" "

food

bread, their drink

fesher beer,

and the

waters of their libations are cool."

237

CHAPTER XL
THE GATE OF
AB-TA.

The Ninth Division of the Tuat.


Having passed through
the Eighth Division of the

Tuat, the boat of the sun arrives at the gateway called

Aat-shefsheft,

^ -

which leads
III
:

to the

Ninth Division, or, as

the opening text reads

<===>

[1

>/

1'

D---^n
^
fl

p-

T^n
I]

p'

[)

'^^'^^

~
'

""*"'

"

This great god cometh to this gate, and entereth

"

through

it,

" great god."

and the gods who are therein acclaim this The gateway is like that through which
the

the god passed into

previous Division, and

its

outwork

is

guarded
are

by nine
described

gods in the form


as

of

mummies, who

the

Paut,

i.e.,

the

company

of

the nine gods,

^iii^.

At

the entrance

to the gate proper stands a bearded,

mummied
similar

form,

with his hands folded on his


1)

l)reast, called

Anhefta,
form

and at

its

exit

stands

238
called
"

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


Ekmen-ta,
'"
;

each of these
ft

is

said to

extend his arms and hands to Ea,"


fi

1
is

cj^^j

or

^ 2^-==
fire,

1^=^

The

corridor

swept by
of

flames of

which proceed from the months

two

nraei, as before.

The company

of the gods

the outwork address Ea, and


"

say, "

who guard Come thou to us,


thou great

thou who art the head of the horizon,

"god who openest the


"

secret places, open for thyself

the holy pylons, and unfold for thyself the holy doors

" tliereof,"

^^rn(f|[,^,,cO:]JDV^

1^ c=.^|
AAAAA^
1

-innmr

^cz:^

j,^^

_g^

nzsiD -^z::^

^'^^-^

Jl

monster serpent which stands on his


the door
of text
"
is

tail

and guards
lines

called Ab-ta,

"
,

and the two

which

refer to his admission of

Ea
Sa

read, "

He

who

is

over this door openeth to Ea.


'

saith unto

"
"
"

Ab-ta,

Open thy gate

to Ea, unfold thy portal to

KiiUTi, so that he

may

illumine the thick darkness,

and may

send light into the hidden abode.'

This gate
it,

" closeth after this " souls "

god hath passed through


it

and the

who

are on the other side of

wail

when they
,

hear this door closing upon them,"

-^^ ^
a/v!La

,v,,,^

..^g^ 5li

OTt Timmr [i:^

awwv

a^^wvs

^ W

,l. l

.-'.

.,

'

'

*' '

The Gate

of Ab-ta.


240

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

III

AWW\

c^
M

J\

v>A

ratK ^ _zr
J\
IIIIMIII
1

- -

^
Ra

A^/wvs'

In the middle of the Division we see the boat of


being towed on
;

its

way by
is

four gods of the Tuat,

^
III

the god

in the

same form

as before,

?^ II
i

>AAAM

\_
I

AW^WX

Tho Boat

of Af-Ril in the

Ninth Division of the Tuat.

and Sa stands on the look-out, and


instructions
as
to

Heka
:

obeys his

steering.

The

procession

which

marches in front
1.

of the boat consists of

Six bearded male figures, standing upright,

who
these

hold in their liands the ends of a rod, or rope, which


is

l)cnt in tlie

shape of a liow over


" tlioso

tlicir lieads

are descril)od as

who

are over the words of

magical power,"

pni^^^^ii^^l^i-

THE GODS WHO CAST SPELLS


2.

241

Four dog-headed
;

apes,

which hold a rod bent as

already described

these are described as " those


of

who
1

work magic by means


3.

knots for Ea,"

ogjggo (1(1

v^

O.

Four women, who stand upright, and hold a bent

Gods, goddesses, and apes casting spoils on Apop.

The speannen.

Sliesshes

and Apep.

rod, or rope, over their heads like the four apes

and

the six male figures; they are descril)ed as "those

who

work magic by means


4.

of

knots for Ea," "im^

[1 (1

Tbree male
VOL. n.

figures,

each holding a harpoon in


li


242

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


and a cord in his
o

his right hand,


"

left

they are called

spearmen,"
is

v\

\\

^^

Immediately in

front of these

a beartled male figure,


;

who
and

has been

lying prostrate on his face

he has upon his head a


ass's ears,

small solar disk and a pair of


is

his

name

Aai,

(]'^^(](]5

i-e->

the Ass.

In his hands he

grasps a rope, which passes over his head and along his
back, and
left
is
;

held by each of the three spearmen in his


his

hand

from the knees upwards

body

is

raised

in a diagonal position,

and

this attitude suggests that


of the rope, or

he has either raised himself by means

has been pulled into this position by the spearmen.

Facing the Ass are


^^^^'
,

1.

Tlie

monster serpent Apep,


Shessiies,

and
tail

2.

The

crocodile

rm

izszi

1,

with a

ending in the head of a serpent.

The
reads
:

text,

which

refers to the

whole

of this section,

J\

/vwwv

^H

III

-^

III

O
I

^ jr
I

<^=> Ji

fl

Ji

111

'

/wvw.

(^

7\

Ji^ ^

X m.

243

DEFEAT OF APEP

D D

'

_M^

AA/VNAA
I
I I
'

^ W
AAAA/NA
I I I

Q AAAAftA Zl

7i

^<- <^^
I I
I

^ n n * -^ W ^
/V/yy^/^

^^^

l^k^^ml'n^rfiflraqypjiii

ii-q^rsr^i^^^i^y-'^^
(fe^

D D

^"^/wv^ il^l^ZJ

J]

III

-::=:P5

i^iyi^y
I I
I

BV^\A
w
I

rn
,v

uii^

/VWW\

^^

1-^-^

m <=> JJ
.,

^::^
^ W

1110
(JAAa
I
I I

1-^^l D
<=]

II
-^

D
(\AAAA

Q.

1VW
:

D <S e IICKl
I

<^C3 <) CI
1
I

D O
is

"

This great god

towed along by the gods


llii

" Tuat,

aud those who tow

along say

The
'

of the

god


244
"

"

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


to his body,

Cometh
shadow.

aud the god

is

towed along

to his

"

be thou at peace with thy body, and we


tliy integrity into

" will

tow thee along in

thy (literally,

" his) secret place. "


"

Come

thou,

Eii,

and be thou at

peace with thy body, for thou shalt be protected by


those

who

are over the curved ropes

(?).'

The
reads
"
"

text

which

refers

to

the

six

men,

four

apes, and four women, with nets over their heads,


:

Those who are in

this picture

march before

E.l,

and

they utter words of power against Apep, and [then]


(or,

"return to the Arit

Hall) of the horizon.

They
Atekti

"journey onwards with him into the height of heaven,


"

and they come into


the two portions
sets),

Ijeing

for

him

in the

"(i.e.,

of the

sky in which
to rise in

Ea
:

rises

"and
"
" "

and they cause him

NUT.

they say their words of power which are these

Out
'

And

upon

thee,

thou Eebel Serpent

Out upon

thee,

thou monster tlmt destroyest, thou Apep that sendest


thy evil emanations
(or,

" forth "

deeds)

Thy

face shall

be destroyed,

Apep.

Thou

shalt advance to the

"
"

block of execution.

The Nemu

are against thee, and

they shall hack thee in pieces.

The Aaiu are against


The Abebuiti
by means
of

"thee,
"
(i.e.,

and they

shall

destroy thee.

the three spearmen) shall drive [their harpoons]

" into thee,


" their

and they
!

shall enchant thee

Hail

Thou

art

destroyed, dashed in pieces,

"

and

stubbe<l to dcatli,

serpent Sessi.'

"

"Those wh<j are

in this scene,

and who have their


THE GODS OF THE SOUTH
"spears, keep

245

ward over the rope


this

of Ai,

and they do
Ijoat of

"not permit
"great
god.

Worm

to

approach the
this

the

They pass behind


"

god upwards.
of this

"These gods who do battle on behalf


"

god in

heaven say

(The speech

is

wanting),

^.

^VW\

MAA^
I

-MMri

1^-^ yvwvwv

11

Mil

Gods

of the

South raising the Standard

of the South.

In the upper register are the following


1.

Four gods, who in the place


and who, aided

of

heads have each a

crown

of the South, to whicli is aflixed a uraeus,


Ijy

upon
of a

his body,

a bearded male figure, are

engaged in raising up from the ground, by means


rope, a pole or staff,

which

is

surmounted by a bearded

246

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


a

human head wearing

crown

of the
1

South

the gods
^i^d

are called " gods of the South,"

the

bearded male figure "he who

is

over the front end,"

2,

Four gods, who

in the place of heads

have each a

'-"^^

c^Z AVMMA <z::^ ^T^


1 1 1 1

Ti_

_'^> Aww\ i

t
M

I
I

'vvwvAA

CZZ

^ ^

<iM Jl

(11^ -tm- czrr ^-A, yi. r

Gods

of the

North raising the Standard

of the Nortl

crown

of the

North, to which

is

aflixed a uraeus,

upon

his Ijody,

and who, aided by a bearded male


which

figure, are

engaged in raising up from the ground, by means of a


rope, a pole or staff,
is

surmounted
of the

l)y
;

a l)eardcd
the gods

Iiuman head wearing a crown

North

'

HORUS-SET AND HERU-AM-UAA


are
called

247

"gods of

the

North,"
is

^^,

and the

bearded male figure

is "

he who

over the hind part,"

3.

Between

the

two

groups

described

above

is

the

hawk

lieaded
.'/.

sphinx which typifies

"'',*.*

*''/

;*'*'*

*.*>

'\\'

"Horus

in the r''.\'>:\'.-

y ::\Mv;'': vW/;

Boat

Above

its

hind -

quarters spring the ywwww


I I

'^^

*^ ^J^\ m

head and shoulders


of a

bearded

human
Ana,

figure

called

wwNA

and on the
of

head

the
of

liawk

and
is

that

Ana
the

a crown of

South.

Standing
of tlie

on the back
sphinx
of
is

the figure
witli

Ueruam-uaa with SetUorus ou

his back.

Horus-Set

t'haracteristic heads,

with his arms outstretched, and

with each hand laid upon the upper part of the crowns
of the South.

The hawk

liead of this figure faces the

back of

tlie

liawk head of the sphinx, and the animal's


is

head, which

cliaracteristic of Set, faces the

back of

the

human head

of

Ana.

It

is

thus quite clear that


248

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


as a

Horns was regarded

form

of the

Sun-god

of the

South, and Set as a form of the Sun-god of the North.


4.

The serpent Shemti, r-vn V\


its

which has four

heads and necks at each end of

body, and each head


of legs.

and neck are supported on a pair


figure

male
the

called
of the

Apu,

\/ ^j
J
;

stands

and grasps

middle
5.

body

of the serpent
(1

with both hands.


,

Tlie serpent

Bata,

with a bearded head

at eacli

end

of his

body
end

each head wears a crown of


of this serpent
is

the South.

Above the back


of tlie of the bodies

another

serpent, from each

body

of

which spring the


of four

upper portions

and heads

bearded

male
of

figures

the

first

figure of each

group has a pair

hands and arms which are raised in adoration, and


legs,

each figure of the two groups has a pair of


rest

which

on the back

of the serpent

Bata.
the

male figure

called

Abetii stands and grasps

middle of the

body
(i.

of the serpent Tepi,

!1 (] ,

with both hands.

Two male

beings, swinging over their heads a net,


to attack the serpent, or to

wherewith they are going


resist him.

The
/VS/W\A

text wliich refers to the aljove reads

AAA/WA

/VWWN

III

Sll

<=

/WSf^V\

THE SHEMTI SERPENT

249

^^A^m^ii^A^m^^i
I

1
I

/\/V\f\/V\

Sim

\\
a,
I

iflVuuu
his

The Sheuiti SerpoLt and

warder Apu.

|-j

^j

.V\/W\A

^
^"^^^

1
I I

<?
1
I

iiJ

111

mi
C

D
1^

LU
/^AAAW^

'''-WW
f\rj\r^/^

<::^

fvw^/v\

<0


250

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

^'I^lP^^
\^Z2
J]

^ &.
I

A^'/v^^

o w
^
I

11^^
^
I

^
I

mjl|3.m(l-[)-i
I

^
I

-*11
I

r^J

AA/\AAA
I I I

<=^

?^

S /wvw.C^^

III

^
(2
111

A/VWV\
I

'J'lic

passage which refers to the gods of the South

reads

"Those who are

in

tliis

scene rise up for

Pia,

wlio

"

THE SERPENTS DATA AND TEPI


" saith

25I

unto thcin

Keceive ye your heads,


'

ye gods,
Hail,

"
"

and draw tightly the front end


ye gods, come into being
!

of

your rope.

Hail, possess ye the


l^eing,

"
"

power

of light,

ye gods, and come ye into


tlfe

ye gods.

Possess ye

power

of light,

ye gods, by

.-:.

;.-

,.

'!.*.. *.,-?

']

ho Stipeiils Kuta

and

Toi)i

and the warder Abeth.

*'

my

coming into being

in the secret place,

and by

my

"power

of liglit in the hidden place (Anient), in the

" cliambers of things.'

The passage which

refers to

Horus-Set reads

"Ra
"

maketli to arise this god.


Eii

This god with his

two faces gocth in after

hath passed by him."


252

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


refers to the gods of the

The passage which


reads
"
:

North
be
to
of

Ka

saith

unto
gods
!

them
pull

Let
'

your heads your


at

" you,
"

ye
North,
of

Eeceive

ye

crowns
the

the

and

ye "tightly

hinder

"end
"

the
"

boat of

"from mo.
Face
! '

Behold

him that cometh into being now Horus of the handsome


refers
to

The passage which


reads
"
:

the serpent

Shemti

He who
and

is

in this picture strideth through the secret

" place, " " "

lie

withdrawetli to Qa-temt, the Hall

(or,

Court) of Anient.

Those who are

in it are the

heads

which have been devoured, and they breathe the


odour of Shemti,
of

which Apu
refers

is

the warder."
the

The passage which


reads
"
:

to

serpent

Bata
up
for

He who

is

in this picture

maketh
of

his rising

" Sak,
"

and he keepeth count


in the Tuat.

the souls which are

doomed
Hall

He

strideth through the secret

"place, and
"
"

he withdrawetli to Tesekt-baiu, to the


;

(or,

Court) of Anient

then Tepi entereth into


it

Bata.

Those who arc in


been devoured.
of

are they whose heads


tlie

" liave

They breathe
is

odour of

"

Bata,

which Abetii

the guardian."

The passage which


reads
:

refers to the

two gods with nets


words
of

"These are the gods who make use


"

of

power

for Horus-lla in Anient.

[They have power]


THE GODS WITH NETS
"

253

over the net, and they

make
:

use of words of power on

" those

who

are in the net[s] which are in their hands."

In the lower register are


1.

Sixteen gods,

who stand

at one

end

of the scene,
first

and grasp a rope with both hands.


are bearded,

The

four

man-

headed beings, and


are said to be
souls
'
I

:^7>7
>

"

the

of

Anient,"

the
are

second
ibis
-

four

headed,
the fol-

and are

"

lowers of Thoth,"

the third four


are

hawk-headed,
"

and are

the fol-

lowers of Horus,"

r Jr
are

^m'
last four

Two

goJa with nets.

and the

ram-headed,

and

are

"the

followers

of

Ea,"

2.

Eight bearded, man-headed beings, who stand at

the other end of the scene in two groups of four, and

who

are described as

"

Towers,"
'Y'

(] (]

% ^r^ J


2 54

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


The rope which
attached to
tlie

each grasps a rope with both hands.


is

held by these groups of beings


of

is

legs

the

enormous

serpent

Kiiepki,

O
its

(1(1

This serpent has a head at each end of


the
of

body,

foremost part of which

is

supported on a pair
of that portion of its

human

legs

from each end


flat

body which

lies

on the ground springs a uraeus.


is

On

the centre fold of the body


its

seated a hawk, which


.

wears on
is

head the double crown, rJ


"

This

hawk
fnatl

the symbol of

Horus

of

the Tuat,"

Hern

55

^
:

W*
text which refers to this section of the scene

The
reads

D
/\A/WV\
I 1
I

^^
I
[O]

i
I
I

I-

fl

.1'^#rr;Ti^
ocrsc

AAAA/V\

v^^^T^V
O

A
I

II

j\

o 5il^^ Jl?

2*^=^

'

THE TOWERS OF KHEPRI

255

cr^

SA

II

J\

ira(iyi^r^^i!:af^^i

w
v^

i=s:

nil

^ J^ r^ i ^ iii^Aiyf ^:^'J"^ ^
/.

I :pti

z^^ Aww* U)^.' j^I^T ^


<=>
vww\ >*^
>

m ViL^^^'^'^<=> IL

if

AA/x*^,^-^'*^

^ ^ .L^.; *

*>

^Tbe Souls of Anient, and

tlie

Followers of Thotli

who tow Khepri.

A,V\^W\

'^

J\

AM^J^

o JTflfelL!!
n

cG

JJ

v^

^/v^AAA

256

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

ii^qqmqv
^^
^
III

iiiiimi

.III P-^

J\

^^

/wwv,

r^^^

^(jraqq^f^lg

^is-^
t

AMVMM

t??^-.^*lJ-l^.^iii:nft?Tl

**

*'

*-''

The Followers

of

Uonis and the Followers

of Rii

who tow Khepri.

"Those who are


" liands,

in

tliis

scene have the rope in their

and

it is

fastened to the leg[s] of Khepri,


to the
tlie

who

" "

moveth backwards
draw
this rope
liini

Hall of their horizon.

They
npon
from

with

god into their horizon, and


Tliey live
is

"

they tow

along in the sky (Nut).

" tlic tilings of

the Sonth, and their snstcnancc

"the things

of tlic Nortli, [and tliey exist]

on

tliatwliicli


KHEPRI AND IIORUS OF THE TUAT
"

"

257
of

Cometh

fortli

from the mouth

of IiA.

The voice

" this serpent Kiiepiji


" into "

goeth round about and travelleth

the secret place after

Ra hath

entered into the

height of heaven."

The four groups, each containing four


"
"

unto

Ra

Come,
'

beings,

"say
!

come, after thy transformations


tliy

Come,

Ra,

after

transformations

Appear,

'

'

'

'

''**
The

>

...'.

....>

.> .t. .

Serjient Khepri

and Horns

of the Tuat.

" appear, after

thy transformations

Appear,
the

Ra,
great

"after thy transformations in heaven, in


"

heaven

Hail

We

decree for thee thy habitations

"

by the excellence which

"

is in the words of the Mighty One of Forms in the secret (or, hidden) place.' The passage which refers to Horus reads " He who is in this scene is IIeku Tuati (i.e., Horus
:

VOL.

II.

258
" of

NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


the Tiiat).

The head cometh


[in

forth

from him,

"and the forms


"coiled [serpent].
" the
" in

which he appeareth] from the


unto this god to
;

Ra, crieth

whom

two divine Uraei unite themselves


him."

he entereth

upon the way into Khepki, who listeneth when Ea


heings, " have

" crieth to

The two groups, each containing four

The

Eit,'ht

Powers who tow Khopri.

"in

tlieir

hands the

ro})C wliicli is

"of KiiErKi, aiid

tlioy

say to

llfi:

'The ways

fastened to

tlie

foot

of the

"hidden place are


" "

o])en to thee,

and [the portals] whicli

arc in the earth are unfolded for thee, the

Soul

whicli

Nut

loveth,

and we
!

will guide

thy wings to the moun-

" tain. "

Hail

Enter thou into the East, and make thou


tlie tliighs of tliy

thy passage from between

motlicr.'"

259

CHAPTER

XII.

THE GATE OF SETHU.


The Tenth Division of the Tuat.
Having passed through
the boat of
\=J^
(1(1

the Ninth Division of the Tuat,

tlie

sun arrives at the gateway Tcheserit,


to the

which leads

Tenth Division,

or,

as the opening text reads:

-^
[]

A/^W>A

|1

AAWVv

~>_.^^n |G'

/\rvw\/\

1
I

^ /VWV^A AA/VNAA

1
I

'

111

1
I

"If^ U _Z1

'

""^'

" ^^^^^ g^'^^

so J Cometh
it,

"

forth to this gate,

and entereth through

and the

"gods who are therein acckim the great god."

The

gateway

is

like that

through wliieh the god passed into


its

the previous Division, and


sixteen
uraei.

outwork

is

guarded by
gate

At

the

entrance to

tlie

proper

stands a bearded,

mummied form

called Nemi, (0(1,


its

who

holds a knife in his hands, and at

exit stands
(1(1.

a similar
corridor
is

mummied form

called Kefi,
fire,

The

swept by flames of

which proceed from

the mouths of two uraei, as before.

The uraei which

26o

TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


"

guard the outwork address Ra, and say,


" us,

Come thou

to

thou wlio art at

tlie

head

of the horizon,

thou

"great god
"

who openest
<?

the secret place, open thou

the holy pylons and unfold the portals of the earth,"


\\ Q

<c=><==>

ao=>
The
monster

C30

-nmiir

ni

\=^

iiiiiiiir

serpent

which

The Boat

nf

Af-Ra

in the

Tenth Division

of the Tunt.

stands on his
I

tail

and guards the dour

is

called Setiiu,

and the two

lines of text whicli refer to his


:

(5

'

adndssion of lia read


"

"

He who
tliat lie

is

over this gate


'

opcneth to Ha.

Sa

saith

unto Setiiu,

Open thy
liidden

"gate, unfold thy portal, so


" thick darkness,

may

illumine the
tlie

and may send

liglit

into

"al)ode.'

This gate closeth after the great god hath

^2*
,vvww\

r.l

'

I' 1

ifc.

The Gate

of the

Serpent Scthu.


262
"

TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


it,

passed through
wail

and the uraei who are on the other


it

" side of it

when they hear

closing

upon them,"

(]4IQ^^, ^ _B^
1

^ ran
1
I

I.

"mmnr ^/^ww
])oat of

In the middle of this Division we see the

the

sun

Ijeing
; '

towed on
god
is

its

way by

four gods of the 'Puat,


as before,

^
\\

tlie

in the

same form

and

his

boat

is

piloted by Sa,

who commands, and by Heka,


front
of

who

steers according to his directions.

The procession
consists of
1.
:

in

the

boat of

the sun

bearded

male

figure

called

Unti,

^ w

^^ 4'

i.e.,

the "god of the hour,"

who

holds a star in each

hand.
2.

Four knceliug gods, each with a uraeus over his

head.

The
is

first

is

noitus,

Vk,? hawk-lieaded

the

second

Sereq,
is

""^^^

Itcardcd,

and wearing a wig;

the third
tlie

Abesh, bearded and without a wig; and


is

fourth

Sekiiet,

^^'i^^^

^^^^

hcixd

of

lioness.

THE GODS WHO LIGHT THE SKY


3.

263
>k
111)

Three bearded beings, the "Star-gods,"


is

i,

each holding a star in his right hand, which


aloft,

stretched

and with

his left towing a small boat containing

the "Face of the Disk."


4.

A
"

small boat holding a nracus, which has the

latter part of its


is

body bent npwards


[1

within the curve

the
5.

Face

of tlie Disk," "^

^^^^
its
tail,

The winged serpent Semi, standmg on


its

with
6.

body in

folds.

The bearded
tlie

figure Besi,

'

(IU5

receiving in his

hand

flame which spouts up from the head of a


of

horned animal, which forms the top


transfixed

staff,

and

is

by a

knife.
(111,

from each side


figure.

of

the neck of which grows a bearded,


8.

mimimy

Four women, each with both hands raised in


;

adoration
9.

they are described as

" Criers,"

C^

ij

"^

Two

bows, set end to end, ^^^-ss^', on each of


their heads.

which three uraei rear


on the end

Standing over the


foot

place where the two ends of the


of each, is the

bows meet, with a

two-headed figure HoRUS-

Set, with two pairs of hands, one pair on each side


of his body, raised in adoration.
"

Horus-Set

is

called

he of the two heads,"

^^
W

, '

and the two bows are


t\

" the

Crown

of the Uraei,"

1)

w.

^
264

THE TUAT
:

TENTH

DIVISION OF

The

text which refers to the above groups reads

-
I

(&y^
1
I I I

W^VW\

A/VW^

Aw^A^
1
1 I

?^
lllllllll

^
I

^ w
o A' o

I*

CM^
D

O
A^/VV^A /W\/VNA

LraJ

^ q D o1
^
I

^'^^^

-<2>-

-.40

AAftA^^

^tijrrA
A^/wv^
I I
I

AAAAAA
I

lO

^
.^^ rrv-i
ft

m
<^>^

7\
I

^
L)
I

o ^ ^
/I\

III

(^

A ^^^

X "^ '^ Q AA/WW

/WVV\A
^

nU A^yWW 111'^ MM II

(7)

t^^'^'-^i

A/^^AA

yi

i^f^(]^Y
I

tJ:A'
>^w^^v^

O
^

JIX

^
11

ci

<c=r>

JJi

AAAA*V\
I

/vV^^VsA

LA-i

^^2
^<^
I

Vs/Vs/VS

III

/I

Ji

raiie^i?fly


THE GODS WHO LIGHT THE SKY
265

^
-'-'
_

ra
^'^x. >=*>- 1"^^*^ r/wvw
-^

<=> ^1
"

COj

F=q
is

iii

-A

<=>
:

^^-.^

This great god

towed along by the gods

"

Tuat, and those

"
"

We are who tow Ea along say towing along, and Ra towing Ra along, we are Ra
'

of the

fulloweth [us] into Nut.

have the mastery over


thou Face of Ra, and
;

"
"

thy Face, indeed thou shalt unite thyself to thy Face,


Ra, [by] Maat.

Open,

let

" the " "

two Eyes

of

Khuti enter into thee


forth, the
"
liglit.'
:

drive

away
liglit

thou the darkness from Amentet.

Let him give

by what he hath sent

Of the god with


"
"

stars it is said

He maketh

a rising up for

Ra
tlie

(or,

he stablisheth
;

Ra), Unti makctli to be light

upper heaven

this

"god leadeth the hour, which performeth that which


"

belongeth to

it to

do."
it is

Of the four seated gods


"

said

The

[four] serpents

who

are in the earth keep

"over those who are in


" rising

this picture.
sit

ward They make a

up

fur Ra,

and they

upon the great image[s

"
" "

which

are]

under them, and they pass onwards with

them

in the following of Ra, together with the hidden

images which belong to them."


266

TENTH
DIVISION OF


THE TUAT
:

Of the three gods who hold

stars it is said

"Those who are


" their stars,
" boat,

in this picture sing

hymns with
of their

and they grasp firmly the bows


it]

[and

entereth into Nut.

And
to

this

Face of

"Ea moveth
"

onwards, and saileth over the land, and

those

who

are in the
(i.e.,

Tuat sing hymns


establish Ea)."
it is

it,

and make

"

Ra

to

stand up

Of the winged serpent Semi


" [It

said

maketh a

rising

up

for Ea],

and

it

guideth the

Gods

of Liyht

aud

Fire.

Star-gods.

Face of the Disk,

Semi.

"

Well-doing god into the Tuat of the horizon

of the

" East."

Of the god Besi

it is

said

"He maketh
" "

a rising

up

for Ea,

and
his

lie

ilacet]i
is

fire

on the head and horns

(or, [in]

hands

the

fire
is

from the head and horns), and the weapon which

in

" tlie

hand

of the

Fighter

is

in the follower of this god."


it
is

Of the
said
:

r.raeus

with the double male figure

"It maketli a rising up

for Ea.

Tlie stablishing of


MEHEN AND HORUS-SET
"

"

267
is

Time which

is

reckoned in writing by years


it

with

" this uraeus,


"

and

maketh
said

it to

go with

liini

into the

heights of heaven."

Of the
"

"

Criers "

it is

Those who cry unto


come,
!

Ea

say,

'

Enter

in,

Ha

" Hail,
" of "

Ra

Hail, come,

thou who art born

the Tuat
!

Come,

offspring of the heights of

heaven

Hail,

come thou

into being,

Ea

'

^' =>

m ~A = =^
\.i //
I

"tf" 5>

r\-

S^
*

" ^^

P"^

^^ =>f

'^ *

Besi.

Aukhi.

The goddesses who

hail the god.

Meheu aud

llorus-Set.

Of the double bow


"This
"strideth
"
is

it is

said

the

Mehen
the

serpent of

the uraci, which

through

Tuat.

The

two

bows

are
of

stretched out, and they bear up on themselves

him

" tlie

Two-Faces

(or,

Two-Heads,

i.e.,

Horus-Set) in his
them.

"mystery which
"

[ai)pertaineth]

to

They

lead

the

way

for

Ea

in the horizon of the east of heaven,

"and they pass on


" train."

into the heights of heaven in his


268

TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


:

In the upper register are


1.

The four Antiu

2;ods,

each of

whom

holds a knife in his

riglit

hand, and a short staff with


left.

one end curved and curled in his


2.

The

four

Henatiu

gods,

|
of

'^

^^1
;

^'

^^^^^

having four uraei in the place

a head

they are
gods.

armed with weapons

similar to those of the

Antiu

The Anliu and

Ilcnatiu

Gods attacking Apep.

3.

Tlic undulating length of the serpent Apep,


it is said,

of

whom

D D' "his voice goeth round the Tuat,"


Attached
to

K^^.

_B^

the

neck

of

the

iir=i'

monster

is

a very long chain, which rises in an oval

curve, and, passing along tlirougli the liands of sixteen

male

figures, is

then grasped and


it

licld

tlown

liy

a large

hand, from which

again rises in an oval curve, and

passing on for some distance descends into the earth


THE CHILDREN OF HORUS FETTER APEP
immediately in front
curve of
Serq.
tlie

269
first

of

Khcnti-Amenti.
is

On

tlie

chain, lying fiat on her face,

the goddess
M

Of the sixteen bearded figures who grasp the chain


]ioth

with

hands, four are called Setefiu, '=^


;

f) [^

and face

to the left

the twelve are described as the

"TCHATIU
.
I

gods, strong of arm,"'^'^'^

i"^^^^ ^^\
pulls

The
is

right

hand which grasps and

down
j^
j

the

chain

called "

Hidden Body,"
of

^^
)

Lengthwise on the second curve


lean the upper porticjns of

the great chain

the figures of five gods,

each of

whom
in

grasps the chain with his right hand,


his
left

and holds

a sceptre

and the end


coils.
/

of

a
of

chain which fetters a serpent in


the
first

The name
,

serpent

is

Uamemti, -Tl

\:zzj

but of the
five

remaining four no names are given.

The

f'ods

appear to grow out of the great chain, and are called


SeB,

"^ J,Me.ST,
,

^,
the

HaPI, ^t\l\, TUAMUTEF,

^^
of

and Qebiisennuf, [5||}^^^^.


section
of

At
the

the end

this

scene

stands

bearded

mummied

figure of

Khenti-Amenti, wearing the White


sceptre
1

Crown and the mendt, and holding the


two hands.

in his

The
I

text which refers to these groups reads


I I

AA/VsAA

n
I

8
/.wvAA
I

AAAAAA
I
I

^"^

J^

270
A/^VvNA
I

TENTH
n
1
I

DIVISION OF
C^l

THE TUAT
A
D

II

1 ^ W
I

D D

AV'AA/v\

Qg^ O

(3

111

^ O
"^^
D D

^00
-^*-

"==^^

V^

^i^s-^p^:^q^i
Hil'^rn
I

D
'v_

o^
L)
L)

yy^
AAA/VV\
_/i

q
Q
I

AA^VWA AA^VWS

>
^^^
7;(i1)(fl)

^^.=^

/I

/w^AA^

O
D D

j^

F^
I
I

a ^
I

(2

^^ w

A/^VVV\
I I I

/=

^(2 111
111

(2

III

f\ ^ W

II

A/VWNA

C^:^


THE SETEFIU GODS
^-^

27I
AAAAAA
o
\

%\

4;

(?

'^^^(^

111

A/VWVi *

'

/VVWV\

*~

M\N\N\

It

The

Setofin

and other gods

holdinjj

Apep

in restraint.

Of the eight gods


said
"
:

(i.e.,

the Antiu and Henatiu)

it is

Those who are in

this pictnre rise

up

(or,

stand) for

"Ea, and Ea riseth and cometh


" "

fortli for

them, [and

they say],

'

Eise, Ea, be strong,


fetters.

Khuti

verily

we

will

Approach not thou, " Ea, towards thine enemy, and thine enemy shall "not approach thee; may thy holy attributes come
" into

overthrow Apep in his

being within the serpent.

The^^serpent

Apep

is

""

TENTH
DIVISION OF

272
"

THE TUAT

stabbed with his knives, and gashes are inflicted on

"him.
"

Eu

shall stand

up

in the

hour wherein he

is

content

(or,

the hour of peace), and the great god


(i.e.,

" shall pass


" is fixed.' " "

on in strength when his chain

Apep's)

The

reptile (literally,

worm) who

is

in this picture
of this

breaketh asunder the

fetters, [to

and the boat

"great god beginneth

move] towards the region

Seb and

tlie

Ohililren of Tlnrns

lioldint,'-

Apep and

liis

sons in restraint.

" of
"

Apep

this great

god travelleth on after he


in restraint

(i.e.,

Apep) hath been put

by means

of his

" fetters."

Of the four Setefiu gods


"

it is

said

Those who are in

this picture grasp the fetters of


evil,

" the

being of two-fold
Ra, pass
laid

and they say

to Ea,

'

Come
in his

" forward,

onwards, Khuti.

Verily fetters
is

"have been
" Ijonds.'

upon Neiia-iira, and A})Cp

273
it is

THE GODDESSES OF THE HOURS


Of the twelve other gods who grasp the chain
said
" " "
:

Those who are in

this picture [act] as

warders of

the sons of the helpless one, and they keep guard

over the deadly chain which

is

in the

Hidden Hand,

" for the

dead bodies are placed with the things [which


them] in the circuit
of the battlements of
'

" belong to
" "

Kiienti-Amenti.
bo

And

these gods say,

Let darkness
shall

upon thy

face,

Uamemti, and ye

be

"destroyed,
"

ye sons of the helpless one, by the


wliich shall cause evils [to
is

Hidden Hand,
ward over your

come upon

" you]
"

by the deadly chain which


fetters,

in

it.

Seb keepeth
of the fetters

and the sons

" (i.e.,

Mest, Hapi, Tuamutef, and Qebhsennuf) put

"
"

upon you the deadly chain.


under the reckonhig
of

Keep ye
"

[your]

ward

Khenti-Amenti.'
it is

Of the children

of

Horus
this

said

"Those who
" the

are in

picture

make heavy
way."

the
of

" fetters of the sons of the helpless one,

and the boat

Well-doing God travelleth on


:

its

In the lower register are


1.

Twelve male
;

beings,

each of

whom

carries

l)addle

they are called " gods

who never

diminish,"

2.

Twelve female beings, each


;

of

whom
is

grasps a rope

with both hands

above the head of each

star.

They

are called the " hours

who tow along


i
I

[the boat of Ea],"

ci

III

s==
II.

-M^

11

<$.

VOL.

. .

"

274
3.

TENTH
The
*
u;od

DIVISION OF

THE TUAT
with the head of
1

Banti,

^Q
i

/wwv^,

w'

cynocephalus ape, holding a sceptre,


4.

The

Q;od Seshsiia,

man-headed, with a
1

star above him, liolding a sceptre,


5.

The god

Ka-Amenti,
|

\_J ft,

bull-headed,

and

holding a sceptre,

The Twelve Akhemu-Seku Gods with

their Paddles.

6.

The god Eenen-sbau,

^
,

man -headed,

with

a star above him, holding a sceptre,


7.

monkey, with a star over his head, standing on ^' he is called the " god of Eethenu a bracket,
"" ;

(Syria),
8.

^^^.
1

)racket,

whereon

rests the Utchat,

^^


THE AKHEMU-SEKU GODS
9.

275
^^-=^

god

called

Her-nest-f, f=;i ^~^

holding a sceptre.

The

text ^vhich refers to the above reads

P^iAf^ri^m^ili
III
AAA/W\

_
III

F=^

A/V\AAA

n
I

(5

II!

<=:^

^:^ 000 Q ^O ^ CT^ ^ K.=^^^\jn A/^/WV AWW\ vjj <CZr> ill


III
I

Jl

^F=^<=Z=>

^111^

i:^.^^^[0,TJ-F^4n^
II
I I

mm
I

Iw^A^

III

<iJ^e

111

11

^
o

^^^z::^

lin

^=

^^^

111

,^vwv.

^=
/WVvV\

i^ ^

^ ^ JL^

-f-r

fl

1110^(2111111

Si (^111

IM^_^^^-=^

i^<=:=>^

111

ijo

III

<=>i

11

M ^=
I

(e

111(2


276

TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

^'

"imnnr

^.^ a^=_

^=:

Of the twelve gods (the Akiiemu Seku)


"
" " " "

it is

said

Those who are in


tlicy

this picture

make

a rising

up

for

Ea, and

take their paddles in this Circle of


into being of their
is

Unti.

They come

own

accord at

the seasons

when Ha

born in Nut

they come into

being for the births of Ea, and they

make
is

their

"appearance in
" " in "

Nu

along with him.

It

they

who

transport this great god after he hath taken his place


the horizon of the East of heaven.
:

them

Take
'

Ea

saith unto

ye your paddles and unite ye your-

" selves to

" place " place

your stars. Your coming into being taketh when [I] come into being, and your births take when my births take place. ye beings who
me, ye shall not suH'cr diminution,
"

" transport

ye

" gods

Akiiemu Seku.'

Of the twelve goddesses


"

of the hours it is said

Those who are in


l)oat of Efi to

this scene take hold of the rope

"of the

tow him along into the sky.


along,

It

"is they wlio tow


"

Ea

and guide him along the

roads into the sky, and behold, they are the goddesses

"

who draw

alony; the threat irod in the Tuat.

Ea

saith

"

THE GODDESSES OF THE HOURS


"

277

unto them

Take ye
'

tlie

rope, set ye yourselves in

"position,

and pull ye

nie,

my

followers, into the

"height of lieaven, and lead ye


" "

me
to

along the ways.

My

births

make you

to

be born, and behold,

my
him
the

coming into being maketh you

come

into being,
for

"
"

stablish ye the periods of time

and years

who is among you.' 1. "The god wlio

is

in

this

picture adjureth

The Twelve Goddesses

of the Uours.

"

pylons to open to

Hii,

and he goeth on

his

way by

his

" side."
2.

"

The god who

is

in this picture crieth out to the

" stars "

concerning the births of this great god, and he

goeth on his
3.

"

way with them." The god who is in this picture


of

crieth to the gods

"of the Boat


"

Ea, and he goeth on his

way with

him."
4. "

The god who

is

in this picture setteth the stars

278
" in their

TENTH

DIVISION OF

THE TUAT

places (literally, towns), and he goeth on his

way with the great god." The above four paragraphs must refer to the four gods Banti, Sesiisha, Ka-Ament, and Eenen-sbau,
"

and therefore the god

of

Rethenu, the Utchat, and the

god Her-nest-f remain without descriptions.


the tomb of Eameses VI.

From

M. Lefebure adds the two

IW
Baiiti.

A.I'

Schhshi.

Ka- ReneiiAnienti. sbau.

Neter-

Eye

of

Rfi.

Hei'-nest-f,

Rethen,

following paragraphs which concern the Utchat and

Her-nest-f,

f=
the
it

"This
" himself,
"

is

Eye

of Pai,

which the god uniteth

to

and

rejoiceth in its place in the boat."


of this Circle
;

This

is

he who openeth the door

he

" "

remaineth in his position, and doth not go on his way

with Ea."

, :

279

CHArXER

XIII.

THE GATE OF AM-NETU-F.


The Eleventh Division of the Tuat.
Having passed
Tuat, the
Ijoat

througli
of

the

Tenth Division

of

the

the

sun arrives at the gateway

Shetat-besu,

-^=f^
I

Sr=^^
or,

11 J Mil'
,

which leads
text

to the

Eleventh

Division,

as

the

opening

reads

:=i^fli'
it,

(]s/i '1141%

in, "This

" [great]

god cometh forth to

this gate, this great

god

"entereth through

and the gods who are therein

"acclaim the great god."


tlu'ough

The gateway
passed
into

is

like

that

which
;

the

god

the

previous

Division

at the entrance to the gate proper stands

a bearded,

mummied form

called

Metes, r-=^
<

^'=:>^

and

at its exit stands a similar

furm called SiietaU,


of
fire,

The

corridor

is

swept by flames
of

which proceed from the mouths


In the space which
is

two

uraei, as before.
l>y

usually guarded

a nundjer

, .

280
of

ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


gods stand two sceptres,
1 1
,

each of which

is

surmounted by a White Crown


is

the one on the right

the symbol of Osiris,


^^^^.
:

(Sai;),

and the other


is

of

HoEUS,

Between the sceptres

a line of text,
!

which reads
" "

"

They say
!

to

Ea,

'

[Come] in peace [Come] in peace

[Come] in peace

[Come] in peace

thou whose transformations are manifold, thy soul


heaven, thy body
G;reat
is

" is in "

in the earth.
AAAA/^

It

is

thine
r^>

A^^^/\/\

own command,

one,"

[I

t;:^^ r\

^^

The monster serpent which stands on


guards the door
is

his

tail

and
^'^-=

called Am-netu-f, \\- -

,'"

and the two


of Efi read
" "
"
:

lines of text
"

which refer

to his admission

He who

is

over this door openeth to Ra.


'

Sau

saith to Am-netu-f,

Open thy

gate to Ea, unfold

thy portal to Kiiuti, so that he


thick darkness, and

may

illumine the

may send

light into the

hidden

"abode.'
" i)assed

This gate closcth after the great god hatli

through

it,

and the gods who are on the battletliey

"ments wail
A^VW\A

when

hear

it

closing

upon them,"
ilu^ imnr

mmnr imnnr /vwvw A/wvw


Illllllll
lllllllll

^^^ ^ ^^ W

1 I

IT

Cl)

A/WVV\

c\.

L?1

AWVWV
I

MVWWt

r,

t^
I
i

& o
.r
//

it
;.,r

sU-I

+1
it"

9 -

oWo
The Gate; of .the Serpent Am-netu-f.


282

ELEVENTH

DIVISION OF
lllllllll

THE TUAT

(jSglj
.1 In the middle
of this
its

^
Division

A\
we

unnnr

D.

see the boat of the

sun being towed on

way by

four gods of the Tuat,


as before,

^
'*"!

the god

is

in the

same form

and

his

X OS****
Avwwv

* <^> *= -^i^ 111^ 1:^^^


Val

n -SI

'
I

JVWWrt I

l_-c

Wvy <o^

'''''^

c-a

'^r*^.

Tlie

Boat of Af-Rfi in the Eleventh Division of the Tuat.

boat

is

piloted

by Sa, who commands, and


in

ly

TIeka,

wlio steers according to his directions.

The procession
consists of
1.
:

front

of

the

boat of

the

sun

A
first

company

of

nine gods, each holding a huge

knife in his right hand, and a sceptre,

in his left;

the
of

four have jackal heads, and the last five heads


Tlicse

bearded men.

niue beings represent

the

THE SLAUGHTERERS OF APEP


"company
of

28$

the

_
;

^_

gods

who

_^

slay

.._., 0!!! Apep," '^iii

^!

2.

D D_ The serpent Apep,

fettered

by

five

chains which

enter the ground

the fetters are further strengthened


to the larger ones,
of pegs

by small chains, which are linked


and are fastened
to the
1.

ground by means

with

a hook at the top,

In an earlier picture we have

^'iiiii

i^rSf fmi

/C

.^'^
y*

.III

fS^Wal '^^ Avwxp

The Slaughterers

of

Apep.

seen Apep fettered by Seb, Mest, Hapi, Tuamutef, and

Qebhsennuf,

who were

represented by five gods, but


it is

here the figures of the gods are wanting, and

only

the legend "Children of Horus,"

^^ Jj

that tells

us the chains represent the gods.


3.

Four Apes,
wrist.

/vwvna

^^

each holding up a huge

hand and

THE TUAT

284
4.

ELEVENTH
The goddess
of

DIVISION OF

Upper Egypt, wearing the Wliite


ft

Crown, and styled Amenti,


5.

The goddess

of

Lower Egypt, wearing the Eed


I

Crown, and called Herit,


6.

The bearded god

^
Sebekiiti,
1

\\
,

who

holds

the

emblem

of " life " in his right hand,

and a sceptre

in his left.

The

text which refers to the above gods reads


AA/VVV\

S^vVNA

IIICTZJ
(3

<:^>

\\

000

^
^^\
I
I

000-

ac3

g
/^W^A

/4

-A

1
I

^^^

D^^
Q
<=>,

li^^^iM^^Z^D^^
D

/www

1^
^^
^WW\

III

Ji

o
I

\r.
I I I I I

^
"
I

_
(^

II

... III

H
/VWS/V\

A/A/W\

A^/^A^

/WV\AA
I

111

"
1
I
I

D a

^111

/WWW

r-vr-i
fl

9
I

I* =iS>,?
I
I I

1
I

/^/v/W

o K

111

/^=

hill

n c^^

[/wwsa]

^^=^

j\


THE ENEMIES OF APEP
I
l

285

lllllll

""
fi
I i

J^

^.
AAAAAA
I I I

fh^^S:^

w
III
I

o
<2

A,VWNA AAAAA^
I

Z]

A/W^A^

Jl

r.^.^-^^

ra
A^/>^V\

111

^ o

fill

n\

Ji

F=q^
^ w

^-^
III

/]

^
U

Ji
L

J AWVW

Ml
r^^vn

II
i I

A/^^VvA

1
I I
I

/VV\AAA

AV^AAA

II

"

'^

/\fW'/V\

AAA/^^

^^
A^^\AAA
v5l

AAAAAA

^
I

P!J
I

-^^

rn
it is

.Virr^^^^^^l]'
Of the gods
said
"
:

of the

Tuat who tow the boat

of

Ra

The gods

of

the

Tuat

say,

'

Behokl the coming


[his]

" forth [of

Ea] from Ament, and

taking up
[his]

[his]

" place in the


"
"

two divisions

of

Nu, and

perform-

ance of

[his]

transformations on the two hands of Nu,

This god doth not enter into the height of heaven,


'

Supplied from CliauipoUiou, Monuments,

torn,

ii.,

p. 537.


286
" [l)iit]

"

ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


he openeth
[a

way through]

the Tuat into the

" " "

height of heaven hy his transformations which are in

Nu.

Now, what openeth the Tuat


is

into

Nut

(i.e.,

the

sky) are the two hands of Amex-een-f

(i.e.,

he whose

"
"

name
and

hidden).

He

existeth in the thick darkness,

light appeareth [there]

from the starry

night.'
it

Of the nine gods with knives and sceptres


said
"
:

is

Those who are in

this scene [with] their

weapons

" in their
" at

hand take
;

their knives

and hack [with them]

Apep

they

make

gashes in

"

him, and they drive stakes


regions which
are
in

" the

him and slaughter whereby to fetter him in the upper height. The
hands
of the

" fetters of the


" of " "

Horus,

Eebel are who stand

in the

Children
this

tlireateningly

by

god

with their chains between their

fingers.

This god

reckoneth up his members after he whose arms are

"

hidden hath opened [the door] to make a way for Ea."

Of the serpent Apep

it is

said

"The Children
"

of

Horus grasp firmly


and

this serpent

which

is

in this picture,

in this picture they rest

" in

Nut

(i.e.,

the sky).

They heap

their fetters

upon

"him, and whilst


"

his folds (?) are in the

sky his poison

drops

down from him

into Amentet."
it is

Of the four apes holding liands


" It is

said

those wlio are in this picture

who make ready


and

"for Efi a
"

way

into the eastern horizon of licaven,


hatli created

they lead the way for the god who

them

"

with their hands, [standing] two on the right hand


APEP
"
"

; ;

IN

FETTERS

287
god

and two on

tlio left

in the double dtcrt of this

then they come forth after him, and sing praises to

" his soul


" his

when

it

looketh u})on them, and they stahlish

Disk."
deities it is said
:

Of the three remaining


"

Those who arc in

this picture turn

away Set from


its

" this

Gate

[of

the god Tuati.

They open

cavern,

**

;i^^

^Sr ""^

^
II.
I 1 I

-^

^""^

.-^

'"'^

AWNVA

^^

V
>*wwv\

^1 Bill

V
''^^^^^

AWWW ^7*"

p.-^

An *=
"^

(t7
\

mAm

>

m^

Apep

fettered

by the chains of Seb and the Children

of

Horus.

"

and stablish the hidden pylons, and

their souls remain

" in the following of Ra]."

In the upper register of this Division are


1.

hand

I'our gods, each holding a disk in his right

these arc " they

who hold

light-giving disks,"

V^

288
2.

ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


Four gods, each holding a
star in his right

hand

these are " they

who hold

stars,"

3.

Four gods, each holding a


:

sceptre, 1, in his left


forth,"

hand
4.

these are " they

who come

IJfl

V^

Four ram-headed gods, each holding a sceptre

in

''..

n
I

-/^

AVWAA _!_' *VWWA


I

jt>
1

5ww

t^

T
'

^v^^^

^^ Jl>
"^

<=

'

-^
L'f]

I
I I

e.

'

=-

"^

A*WW\ AWWyw AWVW\

yyvwMvv

The Apes who

praise Ra.

Ameijti.

Ilerit.

Sebekhti.

his left

hand; their names are Ba, "^^, KliNEMU, Q,

Penter,
5.

^
,

and Tent,

^^^^^

Four hawk -headed gods, each holding a sceptre


hand;
tlicse are called lloitus,

in

Ids left

^^,

Asiiemth,

^^V i=5,

Sept, A, and Ammi-uaa-f, u -


THE GODS OF THE DAWN
6.

289

Eight female
uracils

figures,
its
;

each seated on a seat formed

by a

with

body coiled up, and holding a


these are called " the protecting

star in her left

hand

hours
7.

tit
crocodile-headed god
called

Sebek-Ea, who
its tail

grasps a fold of a serpent that stands on


right hand,

in his

and a sceptre

in his left.
:

The

text which refers to these reads


I

'<'

-i

I I

...... AAA/V^^

|-iii

iil|

AAAAAA A/V\A/\A

rL

^^
/i/,/w\A

/WV^^^ AAA/\AA

...... /\IVW\f\

-^i^

^-^

lino
11
I

?Q

ill^^M^fl^
I

o
/V
III

^^.
I I
I

AAA/VV\ A/V\A/VN ^'VVN'^A

p.

<:=>,^-S^

DOO0

>k

111^
I
I

III
I

^
I

-M^

<=>U

/ww^^ 1

III

AA/VvV\

/\VvV\\

/VWs/V\
'::^

(^

i.

nil

III

III

^^^^ J

^ D

A/\AAAA
I I I

1
I

'

iii^Ji

A^I'T^'^^-^^^'^ ^w^ Jr ^ D Jr
I

o
u

111

VOL.

II.


290

ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


^^/^AA^
AAAAAA
*
'

J
I

e lip
IZITD

^
D

^ w
II

1
D

^
A/WV\A
/I\

^^
I I

^^-mp
,,**, ,<
**.*.***
.

a e

.,,^11;

..-,",

I*'

*"

-f

^*

^'i-

The gods who bring Disks aud Stars for Ra

m
111

^
7i

iz:
\\ AAAAAA

1
I I

f:/V\/\/V\

A^WvAA

tJ'
I

^3 AAAAAA

1
I

-si)

'^'
[
I

A^^^/v^A

A^^SAAA

^ w

1^
/A^-^AA

T^^

^^^^.^ A^ywv ^v::--^


I I

111

-^

II

A^A/NAA

D
A/VWV\


2gi
:

THE GODS OF THE DAWN


Of the four gods bearing disks
" "
it is

said

Those who are in


it is

this picture carry the disk of Ra,

and

they

who make a way through


heaven by means
of this

the Tuat and


is

" the height of

image which

"in their hands.


"

They utter words

to the

Pylon of
of ISTut

Akert so that Ea may


the sky)."
<i;ods

set liimself in the

body

" (i.e.,

Of the four
,

bearing stars
.i^i.i.i,.

it is

said

; . J

I.

The

gods; who prepare the Uflermgs

and Shrine

of Ra,

"Those who are in


"

this

picture

carry stars, and


Efi they

when

the two arms

cf

Nu

embrace

and their

" stars
"

shout

hynms

of

praise,

and they journey on

with him to the height of lieaven, and they take up


places in the body of Nut."
it is

" their

Of the four gods bearing sceptres

said

"Those who are in

this

picture

[having]

their

"sceptres in their hands, are tliey

who

stablish the


292


ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT
of this

"domains
" their "

god in the sky, and


the

they have
of

thrones in accordance with

command
:

Ea."

Of the four ram-headed gods

it is

said

"Those who are


"
"
"

in

this

picture

[having]

their

"sceptres in their hands, are

they

who

decree [the

making ready]

of the offerings of the


it

gods [from] the


to

bread of heaven, and


forth celestial water

is

they

who make

come

when

as yet Eri

hath not emerged

" in

Nu."
it is

Of the four hawk -headed gods

said

"Those who are in


" shrine [in

this

picture

[having]

their

"sceptres in their hands, are they

who

stablish the

the boat of Ka], and they lay their hands


of the

"on the body


"

double boat of the god after

it

hath appeared from out of the gate of Sma, and they


[of

"place the paddles


"

the boat] in Nut,


it (i.e.,

when
it]

the

Hour which

presideth over

the boat) cometh

" into being,

and the Hour [which hath guided

goeth

" to rest."

Of the goddesses who are seated on uraei


said
"
"
:

it

is

Those who are in

this picture

with their serpents


stars,

under them, and their hands liolding

come
call

" forth
"

from the two Atekt

of this great god, four to


;

the East and four to the

West

it

is

they

"

the Spirits of the East, and they sing

who hymns to
is

this

"god, and they praise him after his appearance, and


"

Setti cometh forth in his forms.

It

they

who


who

' . ;

THE GODDESSES OF THE ATERTI


"

293

guide and transport those

are in the boat of this

" great god."

There

is

no description

of the crocodile-headed

god

Sebek-Eu Four
;

in the text.
:

In the lower register are


1.

gods,

each
"

wearing

the

Crown
South in

of

the

South

these are the

Kings

of the

chief,"

M^

The goddesses

of the Aterti.

2.

Four bearded

gods, " the

Weepers,"

^=^

'

(1(1

3.

Four gods, each wearing a Crown

of the

North

these are the


4.
i.e.,

Khxemiu,

Vi.

Four bearded gods, the Eenexiu, /www (]()>>' 21


A^/WVv
I

'

"

those "who give names."

5.

Four females, each wearing the Crown


;

of

the

South

these are the

"

Queens

of the South,"

?=>

p^.


294
6.

ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


Four females, each wearinsr the Crown
;

of

the the

North
North
7. 8.

these
"

are,

presumably, the

"

Queens

of

these are the

Khnemut,

f)

^^

111

Four females, without crowns. Four bearded


;

gods,

with

their

backs

slightly

bowed
9.

these are the gods

who

praise Ea.
l]

cat-headed god called Mati,

The

text which refers to these cjods reads


rn AA/vw\ (3

AAAAAA
I I I

11

r^^ ^^
/vvvvv\
-^
I

'^,

^
criD

/wvvv\

^M>

MID

D I

y^

11

u
*^

Li

/WV/^A

i!r^

-lj

A/*/^AA

-ssll

AA/WV\ -5hv-i
I

D D
7i

2;;.

_;^S^

AA/\A/v%

L-^^

o
(^
111

(^

a
I

D D
j\

<^ ^

-^

i i=r^

M'ar.,

Sar, Cliampollion,

iMfoi!!/TOei)fs, torn, ii., p.

539.

THE BEARERS OF RA
I

CROWNS

295

1^11
I

AA/VV\A AA/VW\ AAAA/W AA/^^AA /NA/NAAA -

l^^^Q
J\\
1

1^^

III

l^-w,

iJcmii
I

<5

U
7i
III

qo /10

^ ^
i I I

^=: F=q

^M
^
I

J\

III

^
/V.AAAA

<
I

AAA/W\

riD
^/VW^A
M

II

<^

*-

n
I I

n
I

A
I I I I

-WWNA
(2

^^^

,VWW\

y
J

^-^
I

_w.']fm^=^m^i^=sf
D
"

1[
(2

AAAAA^

D
111

;^1
'*^
r I

D
AA/V^A^

AAA/W\

rAAA/V\
I I I

Jl

^
-H
^i:?^^>

A^AAAA

A/wv
I

fv) ^-^
I

A/V>AA/\

y ^WV\A AVW^A

CliampoUion, Monioaents,

torn,

ii.,

p. 539.


296

ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT

r-vm ^
11

lllllllll

mil lit

(j

J]

imi

MM'
:

llllimi

//

/vw^A^ <:zi::

Jl

cr:zi

.]

The Stablishers

of the

White Crown.

The Four Weepers,

Of the gods wearing the Wliite Crown


" "

it is

said

Those who are in

this picture are

they who

stablisli
;

the

White Crown on the gods who follow Ea


[tliis]

they

"

themselves remain in the Tuat, but their souls go

"

forward and stand at

gate."

Of the four Weepers


"Tliose

it is

said

who

are in this picture in this gate

make


THE BEARERS OF RA
" "
"

CROWNS
297

lamentation for Osiris after

Ea hath made

his appear-

ance from Anient

their souls go forward in his train,

but they themselves follow after Osiris."

Of the four gods wearing the Eed Crown


" "

it is

said

Those who are in

this picture are those

who

unite

themselves to Ra, and they

make

his births to

come

^iSi
<^
:^"s -"

-^

AMWVV\

(5

1'***^^

..

akk.

.*==:

"^^ r"^"

...*...* .*/.*..**
The Stablishers
of the

Red Crown.

The god* who give names.

" to

pass in the earth

their souls go forward in his


(or,

" train,

but their bodies remain in their places

" seats)."

Of the four Eeneniu


" "

it is

said

[Those

who

are in this picture are they

who

give

the

name

to Etl,

and they magnify the names

of all


298
" his
"

ELEVEXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


forms
;

their souls go forward in his following,


(or, seats)."]
^

but their bodies remain in their places

Of the four goddesses wearing the White Crown


said
"
:

it is

Those who are in

tliis

picture are they

who make

A^/VVW\

AVVVV*V

A
C\l'
i I

/www\

N*^f\

b
t 1

aamnNAI

mikim

'

*.

'

Goddesses who

stabli.sh the

White and Red Crowus.

"

Maat

to advance,

and who make

it

to be stablished

"in the shrine of


" in "

Efi

when Ea

taketli

up

his position

Nut

their souls pass

onwards

in his following,

but their bodies remain in their places."


*

Supplied from the tomb of Ramcses YI.


THE GODS WHO PRAISE RA AT DAWN
Of
said
"
:

2g9
it is

tlie

four goddesses wearing the

Eed Crown

Those who are in

tliis

picture are they

who

stablish

" time,
'

and they make

to

come

into being the years for

those

who keep ward

over the condemned ones in the


their life in heaven

"

Tuat and over those w^ho have

"

they follow in the train of this great god."

.^fj AWvv\

=Ir:^'''^^ ~-~ ^^*^


/r

A*vvwi

A\_*

'114

>

r_

.Jr

^HM

lA.
I

",,,1 ^^ ^ ill

Goddesses who drive away Set.

Gods who adore and praise Ra.

Mati.

Of the four females who are without crowns


said
"
:

it

is

Those who are in

this picture in [this] gate

make

"lamentation and tear their hair in the presence of


" this "
"

great god in Anientet


this pylon,

they

make Set

to with-

draw from

and they do not enter into the

height of heaven."


300

ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT


it is

Of the four gods with their backs bowed


"

said

Those who are in this picture make adoration to


sing praises unto him, and in their place in Tuat they hymn those gods who are in the Tuat,

"

Ea and

" the

"and who keep guard over the Hidden Door.


"

[They

remain in their

places."]

["The warder
" in his place."]
^

of the door of this Circle

remaineth

'

Supplied from

tlic

tomb

of

Eamescs VI.

301

CHAPTER

XIV.

THE GATE OF SEBI AND

EERI.

The Twelfth Division of the Tuat.


HAViNCr passed through the Eleventh Division of the
Tuat, the boat of the sun arrives at the gateway

Teseut-baiu,
will

^^ ^ "^^
new

which

is

the last that he

have to pass through before emerging in heaven


day.

in the light of a
"

"This great god conieth


it,

forth to this gate, this great god entereth through

"

and the gods who are therein acclaim the great god."
is

The gateway

like that

through which the god passed


;

into the previous Division

at the entrance to the gate

proper stands a bearded

mummied form

called Pax,

A^

lluAj ^^*^ ^t

its exit

stands a similar form called


^^^^

Akhekhi,
flames of
as before.

QSh^^T^'
fire,

corridor

is

swept

by

which proceed from the mouths


is

of uraei,

In the space which

usually guarded by a
is

number

of gods

stand two staves, each of which


is

surmounted by a bearded head;- on one head


disk of Tem,
of
.^

the

and on the other a

beetle, the

symbol

Khepera.

The text which

refers

to

these reads

....

'

'

'

-'-...J/.l-. .'-

r-3

AWWW
I

^f

I
I

A
i
I

t
1

AAMWV

ir

L*1

Ltl
The Gate
Tesert-Bni'.i.

The doors

of Sebi

and

Reri.

The Sun-god under the form of Khejiera with liis Disk, supported by Nu and received by Xut.

in his

Boat

'

304

TWELFTH

DIVISION OF

THE TUAT

I rri

M iT^

y ^\\\^<^y^ J
their heads, their staves
gate."
its

^
"

M^mn
Jj^
;

"They stand up on

and they come into being on


gate
the heads stand up by the

by the and

"

The monster serpent which stands on


guards the one door
lines of text
"
is

tail

called Sebi, :^

ij

and the two

which

refer to his admission of

Ra
Sa

read,

He who

is
'

over this door openeth to Ra.

saith

" "

unto Sebi,
Khuti, so

Open thy gate to Ra, unfold thy portal to that he may come fortli from the hidden

"place, and
"
"

may

take up his position in the body of


is

Nut.'

Behold, there
in Anient

wailing

among the

souls

who dwell

after this

door hath closed,"

imiiiir

/wvw. '^

W iJl

J^

-M^\.

ii[Z3l'
its

The monster serpent which stands on


guards the other door
is

tail

and

called Reki,

[I

and the

two

lines of text

which

refer to his admission of

Ra
Sa

read, "
" saith "

He who is unto Rem,


Khuti,
place,

over this door openeth to Ra.


'

portal to

so that

Open thy gate to Ra, unfold thy he may come forth from the
his position in the
is

"hidden

and may take up


Behold, there

"body
'

of

Nut.'

wailing

among

the

souls

who

dwell in

Anient after this door hath closed."

THK BIRTH OF THE SUN-GOD


The
text, being similar to that

305

which

refers to Sebi, is

not repeated here.

On
said, "
"

each side of the door

is

a uraeiis, the one repreit is

senting Isis and the other Nephthys, and of them

They

it is

who guard
,;__0

this

hidden gate
'""'^

of

Ament,

and they pass onwards

in the following of this god,"


PI

AA^^^
c^

^H *^
I I

^
D

l-TJ
I

^
j^

j^
q
I

_^ nrzj

Ayvwv.

1 AAAA^ r^-^^

yVNAAAA
I
I

1^ Here we
II

see tliat the


of the
is

end

of tlie

Tuat

is

reached,
of it

and the boat

sun has reached that portion

through which he

about to emerge in the waters of

Nu, and thence


this world.
is

in the

form

of a disk in the

sky

of

Having passed on
"

to the

water the boat


himself, or, as

supported by the two arms of

Xu

the text says,


"

These two arms come forth from the

waters, and they bear up this god," <rr>


/wwvA
/w^/^A^

II

s=z3
M

^'wwv
I

u
I

jYie

god appears in the


is

A^AAA^

boat in the form of a beetle, which


disk
;

rolling along a

on the

left of

the beetle

is Isis,

and on the right

Nephthys.

The three beings

in the front of the boat


imiinr
IIIIIIMI

are probably the personifications of doors, "

and

the gods to the left are See,


-cz:^,

"^^
^12.

L Shu,

[3,

Hek,

Hu,

%,

and

Sa,

In the hierois

glyphics at the top of the open space aljove the boat


VOL. H.

. ;

306

TWELFTH

DIVISION OF

THE TUAT
Matetet

written, "This. god taketli


"

up

his place in the

Boat [with] the gods who are


"^

it,

r-^-i

^.
t^^6

s^n

" ~

''^^'^^
'

^^^'^7

i^^

waters

above, or beyond the boat,

is

a kind of island, formed


is

by the body

of a god,

which

bent round in such a

way
head.

that the tips of his toes touch the back of his

On

his

head stands the goddess Nut, with her

arms and hands raised and stretched out to receive the disk of the sun, which the Beetle is rolling towards her
the text says, "

Nut

receiveth Ea,"

^ ^^
Q
god
is
-^'^^^

The

island formed by the

body

of the

said to be

" Osiris,

whose

circuit

is

the Tuat,"

END OF

VOL.

II.

LONDON
PRIKTED BT GILBBUT AKD RrVINGTON LIMITED ST. JOHlr's HOUSE, CLEBKSKWELL, E.C,

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, LOS ANGELES


This book

THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY is DUE on the last date stamped belo-^

1
University of California

90024-1388 405 Hllgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed.

SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY

FACILITY

THE LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFCWRNIfl UyS ANGELES

(k

3 1158 00764 8354

1
o

UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY

AA

000 136 895

Anda mungkin juga menyukai